9406 IBM AS/400 System Unit Model Fxx

© IBM Corporation 2001


IBM U.S. Product Life Cycle Dates

Type Model

Announced

Available

Marketing Withdrawn

Service Discontinued

Replaced By

9406-F35

1993/02/16

1993/04/05

1996/06/30

-

-

9406-F45

1993/02/16

1993/04/05

1996/06/30

-

-

9406-F50

1993/02/16

1993/04/05

1996/06/30

-

-

9406-F60

1993/02/16

1993/04/05

1996/06/30

-

-

9406-F70

1993/02/16

1993/05/14

1996/06/30

-

-

9406-F80

1993/02/16

1993/05/14

1996/06/30

-

-

9406-F90

1993/02/16

1993/05/14

1996/06/30

-

-

9406-F95

1993/02/16

1993/05/14

1996/06/30

-

-

9406-F97

1993/02/16

1993/05/14

1996/06/30

-

-


Abstract

The AS/400* family consists of processor models that offer a broad range of processing power. These attractively packaged systems feature the latest technology, superior quality and reliability, and improved price/performance. This family supports a broad range of users with a single flexible, high-function operating system, a wide offering of communication capabilities, extensive connectivity, a rich office offering, strong integrated PC support, and many unique programmer productivity tools.

The AS/400 family is designed for ease of operation with extensive menus, prompts, and comprehensive help text available. Online education is included with each system, providing built-in education. Also included is innovative electronic customer support which provides automatic online problem determination and capability for direct connection to IBM and user support data bases through the use of a modem.

The 9406 is offered in modular, rack-mounted packaging that allows users an opportunity to select a system that satisfies current processing requirements while providing a base for extensive future growth. To provide compatibility in the "quiet office" environment, the 9402 and 9404 Systems are available.

The 9406 F models functionally replace the existing 9406 E models, with improved performance and growth capability, and continued investment protection for the system owner.

Model Abstract 9406-F35

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of June 30, 1996)

The Model F35 has a System Unit, 16MB Main Storage, 2.06GB DASD.

Model Abstract 9406-F45

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of June 30, 1996)

The Model F45 has a System Unit, 16MB Main Storage, 2.06GB DASD.

Model Abstract 9406-F50

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of June 30, 1996)

The Model F50 has a System Unit, 64MB Main Storage, 2.06GB DASD.

Model Abstract 9406-F60

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of June 30, 1996)

The Model F60 has a System Unit, 128MB Main Storage, 2.06GB DASD.

Model Abstract 9406-F70

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of June 30, 1996)

The Model F70 has a System Unit, 128MB Main Storage, 2.06GB DASD.

Model Abstract 9406-F80

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of June 30, 1996)

The Model F80 has a System Unit, 128MB Main Storage, 2.06GB DASD.

Model Abstract 9406-F90

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of June 30, 1996)

The Model F90 has a System Unit, 128MB Main Storage, 2.06GB DASD.

Model Abstract 9406-F95

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of June 30, 1996)

The Model F95 has a System Unit, 128MB Main Storage, 2.06GB DASD.

Model Abstract 9406-F97

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of June 30, 1996)

The Model F97 has a System Unit, 128MB Main Storage, 2.06GB DASD.


Highlights

·                     With the addition of processor power and/or DASD maximum capacities, the new 9406 models can grow to support more users and/or more complex applications.

·                     AS/400 9406 system growth is extended with the addition of the 2-Way, 3-Way and 4-Way processors.

·                     The ability to attach the new 9337 Disk Array Subsystem to all 9406 models can greatly improve system reliability, provide increased capacity and data loss protection with the implementation of RAID-5.


Description

AS/400 9406 F Model Base System Unit Description

The new F models of the 9406 System Unit in conjunction with a large range of IBM I/O devices provide an extended range of price/performance for the AS/400 system. The 9406 System Unit contains the system processor, base Multi-Function I/O Processor, main storage, internal DASD of 2.06GB with an additional 2.06GB optional, battery power unit, one communications adapter and a slot for an optional 1/4-inch cartridge tape unit.

The base 2.06GB Internal Disk Unit on F models contains two 1.03GB disk drives, each with one access arm. Optional feature #2802, 2.06GB Internal Disk Unit, contains two disk drives and two access arms.

The Multi-Function Input/Output Processor is a standard feature of the 9406 F models and provides support for attachment of an optional 1/4-inch Tape Unit feature, the internal DASD, and up to two communications adapters. The Multi-Function I/O Processor also provides a hardware data compression function for the optional 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit features. The 1.2GB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit is a 1/4-inch streaming tape drive and is compatible with the 1/4-inch cartridge tape units on the 9402 and 9404 System Units. One communications adapter is also a standard feature on the 9406 system unit. This base communications adapter provides one line with a 232/V.24 enhanced cable that provides for attachment of an IBM 5853, 7855, or equivalent modem. This communications line can be used to gain access to electronic customer support (ECS) facility and for the Remote Power On (RPO) function which allows the system to be powered-on via a telephone call. The second communications adapter is optional and can be featured with either an EIA 232/V.24 adapter (#6154, #6155, #6174, or #6175), an X.21 adapter (#6151 or #6171), or a V.35 Adapter (#6153 or #6173). The maximum aggregate operating rate for both adapters is 83.2Kbps.

Models F80, F90, F95 and F97 are all implementations of N-Way multiprocessor architecture. The Model F80 utilizes two processors, the Model F90 utilizes three and the Models F95 and F97 have four. Utilizing multiple processors in these models results in increased system transaction throughput when compared to a uniprocessor design using the same processor.

Systems used for multiple batch jobs and/or simultaneous interactive tasks will realize the greatest benefit from N-Way architecture. Systems with a single thread batch job will have limited capability for using more than one processor even though the operating system may generate additional tasks (such as asynchronous disk I/O, spool tasks, etc.).

The new 9406 F Model System Units include a rack enclosure and can accommodate DASD, tape, diskette devices, and I/O Card Units. This modular packaging approach allows the customer to select the devices that satisfy current requirements and provides growth for their system in the future. To simplify the ordering process, a concept of predetermined device locations within the rack enclosures is utilized. This results in a system being assembled from one or more of several rack configurations. All interconnecting cables and filler panels are automatically added when the system is built at the factory.

The 9406 F models have the capability to provide the following automatic operations for the system:

·                     Programmed power-off

·                     Power-on by the time-of-day clock

·                     Auto IPL after power-on

·                     Auto Power-on and IPL after power interrupt

·                     Power-on by remote signal

The 9406 F model systems have a security keylock designed to prevent unauthorized use of the system and unauthorized accessibility to data within the system. System availability is enhanced by an extensive package of Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability (RAS) features including easy-to-use problem analysis procedures for the customer. A battery power unit for the system unit (system processor, base Multi-Function I/O Processor, main storage, internal DASD, and feature I/O cards) is standard. The battery power unit and internal DASD, allow the 9406 system to remain powered-up during short power outages and to perform a main storage dump to the internal DASD prior to power-down for longer outages. The internal battery test insures that sufficient battery capacity is available.

An enhanced electrical interface to allow attachment of a vendor- supplied Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) is also provided. UPS provides the capability for the system to tolerate input power quality problems and long power outages.


Models

Model Summary Matrix

9406 Models F35 - F70 System Summary

                          Model   Model   Model   Model   Model
                           F35     F45     F50     F60     F70
                          ----    ----    ----     ---     ---
Relative System
  Performance              4.8     6.0    10.2    14.7    21.0
Main Storage Base (MB)      16      16      64     128     128
   Maximum                  80      80     192     384     512
Feature Main Store Slots     2       2       5       5       5
I/O Card Slots-Minimum      11      11      18      18      17
I/O Card Slots-Maximum      55      55     140     140     195
System I/O Bus               2       2     3-5     3-5     3-7
DASD Capacity Base (GB)   2.06    2.06    2.06    2.06    2.06
  Maximum Internal (GB)    4.1     4.1     4.1     4.1     4.1
  Maximum External (GB)  63.07   63.07   110.2   141.7   251.8
Communication Lines       1-20    1-33    1-33    1-33    1-64
LAN Adapters               0-4     0-4     0-4     0-4     0-6
Workstation Controllers
   Twinaxial/ASCII/       1-12    1-18    1-25    1-35    1-60
   LocalTalk
1/4-inch Cartridge Tape
   120MB                   0-1     0-1     0-1     0-1     0-1
   1.2GB                   0-5     0-5     0-9     0-9     0-9
1/2-inch Reel Tape
   9347                    0-2     0-2     0-2     0-2     0-2
   2440/9348/3422/3430     0-2     0-2     0-4     0-4     0-4
1/2-inch Cartridge Tape
   3480/3490/3490E         0-2     0-2     0-4     0-4     0-4
8mm Cartridge Tape         0-4     0-4     0-4     0-4     0-4
Diskette(8 or 5.25-inch)   0-2     0-2     0-2     0-2     0-2
Optical Libraries          0-8     0-8    0-14    0-14    0-14
Tape Libraries             0-2     0-2     0-4     0-4     0-4
Fax IOPs                   0-10   0-16    0-16    0-24    0-32

Notes:

·                     The relative system performance ratios are estimated based on AS/400 environment RAMP-C workload with a 9404 model B10 with 16MB of main storage and 945MB of DASD equaling 1.0. The ratios shown were estimated at maximum configurations running at 70% utilization. Relative system performance ratios may not be realized in all environments.

·                     One tape device either 1/4-inch cartridge, 8mm cartridge, 1/2-inch reel-to-reel, or 1/2" cartridge is required as an alternate IPL device

·                     Capacities shown are for models shipped from the plant and include any prerequisite expansion features. Some combinations of devices may be subject to configuration restrictions.

9406 Models F80 - F97 System Summary

 
                           Model   Model   Model   Model
                            F80*    F90*    F95*    F97*
                            ---     ---     ---     ---
Relative System
  Performance              36.5    50.5    59.0    71.5
Main Storage Base (MB)      128     128     128     128
   Maximum                  768    1024    1280    1536
Feature Main Store Slots      5       5       5       5
I/O Card Slots-Minimum       17      17      17      17
I/O Card Slots-Maximum      195     195     195     195
System I/O Bus              3-7     3-7     3-7     3-7
DASD Capacity Base (GB)    2.06    2.06    2.06    2.06
  Maximum Internal (GB)     4.1     4.1     4.1     4.1
  Maximum External (GB)   251.8   251.8   251.8   251.8
Communication Lines        1-64    1-64    1-64    1-96
LAN Adapters                0-6     0-6     0-6     0-8
Workstation Controllers
   Twinaxial/ASCII/        1-60    1-60    1-60   1-120
   LocalTalk
1/4-inch Cartridge Tape
   120MB                    0-1     0-1     0-1     0-1
   1.2GB                    0-9     0-9     0-9     0-9
1/2-inch Reel Tape
   9347                     0-2     0-2     0-2     0-2
   2440/9348/3422/3430      0-4     0-4     0-4     0-4
1/2-inch Cartridge Tape
   3480/3490/3490E          0-4     0-4     0-4     0-4
8mm Cartridge Tape          0-4     0-4     0-4     0-4
Diskette(8 or 5.25-inch)    0-2     0-2     0-2     0-2
Optical Libraries          0-14    0-14    0-14    0-14
Tape Libraries              0-4     0-4     0-4     0-4
Fax IOPs                   0-32    0-32    0-32    0-32

  Note:  * Denotes multiprocessors

Notes:

·                     The relative system performance ratios are estimated based on AS/400 environment RAMP-C workload with a 9404 model B10 with 16MB of main storage and 945MB of DASD equaling 1.0. The ratios shown were estimated at maximum configurations running at 70% utilization. Relative system performance ratios may not be realized in all environments.

·                     One tape device either 1/4-inch cartridge, 8mm cartridge, 1/2-inch reel-to-reel, or 1/2" cartridge is required as an alternate IPL device

·                     Capacities shown are for models shipped from the plant and include any prerequisite expansion features. Some combinations of devices may be subject to configuration restrictions.

Maximum

Maximum Communications Lines by Model

                                                          Max    Max
                                                         #2623  other
             Total   Total      Max T1/E1/J1 Lines (3)     +    High Spd
             Comm    High Spd         <  or =            #2666  Lines
Model        Lines   Lines      384Kbps 512Kbps 640Kbps   (2)    (1)
--------     -----   --------   ------- ------- -------  -----  --------
F35           20         6          6       6       4      4       6
F45           33         6          6       6       4      4       6
F50           33         8          8       8       4      4       8
F60           33        10          10      8       4      4      10
F70           64        24          24     16       8      8      24
F80/F90       64        24          24     16       8      8      24
F95           64        24          24     16       8      8      24
F97           96        24          24     16       8      8      24

Notes:

1.                  These are X.21/V.35/ISDN lines which support BSC, X.25, IDLC and SDLC at speeds greater than 19.2Kbps up through 64Kbps. An ISDN adapter is counted as two lines when determining the number of lines supported.

2.                  This is the combined number of #2666 and #2623 features supporting T1/E1/J1 speeds.

3.                  The Six-Line Communications Controller (#2623) supports up to three V.35 SDLC data lines for attachment to T1/E1/J1 facilities through appropriate Data Communications Equipment (DCE). Per controller (#2623) support:

o                                            One V.35 SDLC data line operating at speeds up to 640Kbps

o                                            Two V.35 SDLC data lines operating at speeds up to 512Kbps

o                                            Three V.35 SDLC data lines operating at speeds up to 384Kbps

Customer Setup (CSU)

Not available.

Devices Supported

Direct Access Storage Devices (DASD)

The following DASD and Disk Unit devices are supported on the 9406 System Unit.

9332 Direct Access Storage Device

·                     Model 200 - One Head Disk Assembly (HDA), one actuator, and a storage capacity of 200.3Mb. (Supported only for migration.)

·                     Model 400 - One Head Disk Assembly (HDA), two actuators, and a storage capacity of 400.6Mb.

·                     Model 600 - One Head Disk Assembly (HDA), two actuators, and a storage capacity of 600Mb.

Maximum number of 9332-400 or 9332-600 (on the system order or migrated) per system by model is:

Model
Number     Maximum
        F35  32
        F45  32
        F50  56
        F60  88
    F70-F97 125 *

* There is a limit of 255 DASD actuators attached to a system. The number of actuators provided by the supported DASD or disk units is as follows:

DASD Unit           Actuators
---------             -----
9332-200                1
9332-400                        2
9332-600                2
9335-B01                2
9336 with #1202/#1204   4
9337                    7
Each Internal DASD
  Double Disk Unit      2

9335 Direct Access Storage Subsystem

·                     Model A01 - A controller which can attach up to four Model B01 devices.

·                     Model B01 - A direct access storage device with one Head Disk Assembly (HDA), two actuators and a storage capacity of 855.8MB.

Maximum number of 9335-A01s (on the system order or migrated) per system by model is:

Model
Number     Maximum
        F35  16
        F45  16
        F50  28
        F60  44
    F70-F97  63

Maximum number of 9335-B01s (on the system order or migrated) per system by model is:

Model
Number     Maximum
        F35  32
        F45  32
        F50  56
        F60  88
    F70-F97 125 *

* There is a limit of 255 DASD actuators attached to a system. The number of actuators provided by the supported DASD or disk units is as follows:

DASD Unit           Actuators
---------             -----
9332-200                1
9332-400                2
9332-600                2
9335-B01                2
9336 with #1202/#1204   4
9337                    7
Each Internal DASD
   Double Disk Unit     2

9336 Disk Unit

·                     Model 010 - Two disk drives each with one actuator and a total storage capacity of 942MB. Two optional disk drives each with one actuator and a storage capacity of either 471MB or 857MB.

·                     Model 020 - Two disk drives each with one actuator and a total storage capacity of 1,714MB. Two optional disk drives each with one actuator and a storage capacity of 857MB.

·                     Model 025 - Four disk drives each with one actuator and a total storage capacity of 3,428MB.

Maximum number of 9336 Disk Unit Model 010, 020 or 025 per system by model is:

Model
Number         Maximum
        F35       8
        F45       8
        F50      14
        F60      22
    F70-F97      36

There is a limit of 255 DASD actuators attached to a system. The number of actuators provided by the supported DASD or disk units is as follows:

DASD Unit           Actuators
---------             -----
9332-200                1
9332-400                2
9332-600                2
9335-B01                2
9336 with #1202/#1204   4
9337                    7
Each Internal DASD
  Double Disk Unit      2

9337 Disk Array Subsystem Models 10, 20, 40, 110, 120, and 140

The 9337 Disk Array Subsystem offers enhanced reliability and new availability features, including redundant power, concurrent maintenance and an implementation of the RAID-5 array technique that can improve data loss protection. The 9337 Disk Array Subsystem offers up to seven disk drives in a 19 inch rack mountable unit. Six new models of the 9337 Disk Array Subsystem are available:

·                     9337 Disk Array Subsystem Models 10, 20 and 40

·                     9337 Disk Array Subsystem Models 110, 120 and 140

The base Models 10 and 20 include two 542MB and two 970MB disk drives respectively. Up to five additional feature drives can be added of the same capacity as the base drives by adding feature #1206 (542MB) and feature #1212 (970MB).

Models 110 and 120 provide an implementation of RAID-5 data loss protection for four base drives with the capability of adding three additional feature drives. Model 110 includes four base drives for a total capacity of 1626MB, with the capability of adding three additional disk drives of 542MB each. Model 120 includes four base drives for a total capacity of 2910MB, with the capability of adding three additional disk drives of 970MB each.

Two new models of the IBM 9337 Disk Array Subsystem are now available for the AS/400 9406 D, E and F models. These models offer enhanced reliability and availability features, including redundant power, concurrent maintenance, and an implementation of RAID-5 array technique that improves data loss protection. These models offer up to seven of the new high reliability 2.0GB, 3.5-inch disk drives in a 19-inch rack- mountable unit. Models 40 and 140 double the maximum capacity of previous 9337 Disk Array Subsystem Models 20 and 120. The maximum capacity per a 9309 I/O rack for a fully configured base Model 40 is 82.6GB and 70.8GB of protected data for the high availability Model 140.

The base Model 40 has four disk drives formatted to 1,976MB each with an option to add up to three additional feature drives of the same capacity. The data capacity of the Model 40 ranges from 7,868MB to 13,769MB.

The high availability Model 140 includes four disk drives formatted to 1,976MB each. Up to three disk drives of the same capacity can be added in increments of 1,976MB each. The high availability models employ a variation of the Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID-5) technique which facilitates the reconstruction of data in the event of a single disk drive outage allowing for continued operation. This availability option is implemented by distributing parity across four drives. The data capacity ranges of the high availability Model 140 are 5,901MB to 11,802MB.

Models 40 and 140 attach to the AS/400 9406 D, E and F models via DASD Controller Feature Code #6500. These models also coexist on the same system with previously announced 9337 Disk Array Subsystem Models 10, 20, 110 and 120.

The 9337 Disk Array Subsystems attach to 9406 D, E and F models via the Direct Access Storage Device Controller (#6500). Refer to the 9337 Product Announcements for additional information. Running the 9337 Models 40 and 140 on the 9406 requires the support of a February 25, 1993 or later distribution of OS/400, with cumulative PTF package C3047220 or later applied. If the OS/400 distribution is prior to February 25, 1993, no-charge PRPQ 5799-XBP must be ordered and applied before cumulative PTF package C3047220 or later is applied.

Maximum number of 9337 Disk Array Subsystems per system by model is:

System
Model       9337 Models             9337 Models
Number     10, 20, 110, 120
           15, 115, 25, 125         40, 140, 240
               210, 220
               Maximum                 Maximum *
        F35       4                       3
        F45       4                       3
        F60      11                       8
        F50      11                       6
    F70-F97      18                      12

* Number of drives may not exceed system DASD capacity maximum.

There is a limit of 255 DASD actuators attached to a system. The number of actuators provided by the supported DASD or disk units is as follows:

DASD Unit           Actuators
---------             -----
9332-200                1
9332-400                2
9332-600                2
9335-B01                2
9336 with #1202/#1204   4
9337                    7
Each Internal DASD
  Double Disk Unit      2

9337 Models 15, 25, 115, 125, 210, 215, 220, 225, and 240

The Models 210, 215, 220, 225 and 240 offer enhanced performance using a new 9337 controller with a one megabyte write cache. Capacity is increased up to 17% with eight disk drives per 19-inch rack mountable unit. The maximum capacity per a 9309 I/O rack for a fully configured Model 240 is 94.4GB in Base mode, and 82.6GB of protected data in High Availability mode. In addition, Models 215 and 225 include new state-of- the-art, higher performance, 542MB and 970MB disk drives. Model 240 uses the same 1,967MB disk drive as the current Models 40 and 140. Models 210 and 220 use the same 542MB and 970MB disk drives as in the current models 10, 20, 110, and 120. The remaining new models (Base/High Availability) 15/115, and 25/125 also include new state-of-the-art 542MB and 970MB disk drives respectively. These models are otherwise identical to the current versions of the Models 10/110 and 20/120.

Additional performance and reliability enhancements are gained through the attachment of the new faster 9406 DASD Controller feature (#6501), which is used to attach the new 2XX models. This new feature offers a two-byte wide interface and provides up to four times the instantaneous data transfer rate over feature #6500. New feature #6501 supports up to eight arms per 9337 2XX models and up to two 9337-2XX subsystems.

Together, the system DASD Controller feature, the disk drives in the Models 215 and 225, and the faster 9337 controller with one megabyte write cache in all 2XX models provides a significant performance improvement over previous 9337 models.

These models offer industry leading availability features including: data loss protection through the implementation of RAID-5, redundant power, concurrent maintenance, and state-of-the art 3.5-inch disk drive technology.

Also available is the capability of mixing RAID and mirrored DASD devices in the same OS/400 Auxiliary Storage Pool (ASP). Support is contained in OS/400 Version 2 Release 2 with OS/400 V2R2 9337 Hardware Update feature #1982, which is available on November 26, 1993, or by installing OS/400 Version 2 Release 3, available on December 17, 1993.

IBM recommends that customers using the 9337 High Availability models not mix non-protected DASD unless the ASP is mirrored. This includes the 9337 Disk Array Subsystem Base models. The result of a non-RAID disk failure within a mixed ASP will result in the system going off-line. The recovery time will take longer than a non-protected ASP disk failure. Customers should either mirror their non-RAID DASD when mixing High Availability models in the same ASP, or set up a separate ASP for their High Availability models.

9337 Disk Array Subsystem Models 420, 440, and 480

Three new models of the IBM 9337 Disk Array Subsystem family are now available for AS/400 Advanced System Models 300, 310 and 320. These models introduce the third generation of RAID-5 disk arrays that improve data loss protection and enhance performance with state-of-the-art disk storage technology, and 4MB non-volatile write cache controller. These models also offer improved reliability and availability features, including redundant power, concurrent maintenance, and hot-spare function supported in high-availability mode. The hot-spare function is implemented and supported at the 9337 model level. It is transparent to the AS/400 system.

The three new models offer up to eight state-of-the-art 3.5-inch disk drives in a 19-inch rack-mountable unit. Models 420 and 440 provide 970MB and 1,967MB of storage capacity respectively, with a 4MB write- cache. Model 480 introduces the new 4,190MB disk drive technology with a 4MB write-cache. This doubles the previous storage capacity in the same footprint. The maximum capacity per I/O rack for a fully configured Model 480 in base mode is 201.1GB and 175.9GB of capacity for high- availability RAID-5 protection.

The new, higher performance, 4MB write-cache controller can also be installed as a feature on existing 9337-2XX models. It requires the support in OS/400 Version 2 Release 2, or later, with no-charge feature #1984, OS/400 DASD Hardware Update.

Four disk drives come standard in all 9337 4XX models with an option to add up to four additional feature drives of the same capacity. The new models operate in either base mode or high availability mode.

The 9337 4XX models attach to the AS/400 Advanced System Models 300, 310, and 320, and the AS/400 9406 Models D, E, F models via IOP Disk Unit Controller (#6501). The new 4XX models also coexist on the same system with previously announced 9337 Disk Array Subsystem Models 0XX, 1XX, and 2XX.

The 9337 Models 420 and 440 require the support of OS/400 Version 2 Release 2, or later, with no-charge feature #1984, OS/400 DASD Hardware Update. The Model 480 requires the support of OS/400 Version 2 Release 3, or later, with no-charge feature #1984.

Model Conversions

9406 System Units can be field upgraded to higher models. All parts that are removed during model upgrades become the property of IBM.

The following model conversions to F models are available.

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of June 30, 1996)

 From  To    F35    F45    F50    F60    F70    F80    F90    F95   F97
 ----  --   -----  -----  -----  -----  -----  -----  -----  ----- -----
  F35         N      Y      Y      Y      Y      Y      Y      Y     Y
  F45         N      N      Y      Y      Y      Y      Y      Y     Y
  F50         N      N      N      Y      Y      Y      Y      Y     Y
  F60         N      N      N      N      Y      Y      Y      Y     Y
  F70         N      N      N      N      N      Y      Y      Y     Y
  F80         N      N      N      N      N      N      Y      Y     Y
  F90         N      N      N      N      N      N      N      Y     Y
  F95         N      N      N      N      N      N      N      N     Y

Additional Information Regarding Model Conversions

These model conversions involve the replacement of the main processor card and any main storage on the processor card. Model conversions do not include the replacement or addition of any internal DASD. Parts removed or replaced become the property of IBM and must be returned.

For OS/400 requirements, refer to Programming Requirements section.

OS/400 Version 2 Release 2 and later includes programming that provides for the detection of processor model changes on the 9406 via the use of a 16-character system password. The purpose of the system password is to identify all model changes to help maintain the quality and integrity of the 9406 system and to insure the protection of IBM's intellectual property, including IBM Licensed Internal Code and Licensed Programs. After the installation of OS/400 Version 2 Release 2 or later, the system will require a single entry of the system password when a system model change is performed.

There are also rare service conditions that may require re-entry of the system password. If the password must be entered and it is not known, the customer or service representative can select to operate in system password bypass mode. This will allow time to contact the marketing representative, who must obtain the correct system password by placing an RPQ order. If the correct system password is not available and the bypass period expires, the system will not complete the next IPL until the correct system password is provided. In an emergency (system down situation), IBM service can obtain the system password by contacting the ABS Product Support Center.

For more details on the system password, see the System Operator's Guide, SC41-8082. For more information on model conversions, refer to the "AS/400 System Upgrade Roadmap" (GX41-0009).

Feature Conversion Credit

When a 9406 B model is converted to a D, E or F model, the IBM manufactured Magnetic Storage Device Controllers, Magnetic Tape Attachments, and 9346 Magnetic Tape Unit installed in the B model can be returned to IBM for a reduced price on the new replacement Magnetic Storage Device Controllers, Magnetic Tape Attachments, and 120MB or 1.2GB 1/4-inch Cartridge Tape Unit features. The reduction in price for feature conversion is available for the following controllers, attachments, and tape unit and replacements:

·                     Magnetic Storage Device Controllers (#6110, and #6111) are replaced by Magnetic Storage Device Controller (#6112), Removable Media Device attachment (#2611) is replaced by DASD Controller (#6500) or Tape Device Controller (#2621).

·                     Magnetic Tape attachments -- #2602 and #2608 for 2440, #2607 and #2608 for 9348, and #2604 for 3422, 3430, 3480, and 3490. Magnetic Tape attachments #2602, #2607, and #2608 are replaced by #2621. Magnetic Tape attachment #2604 is replaced by #2622 or #2644.

·                     Magnetic Tape attachment -- #2601 and 9346 Magnetic Tape Unit are replaced by the 120MB or 1.2GB 1/4-inch Cartridge Tape Units, feature #6366 or #6368.

Devices that can be brought from B models to D, E and F models

·                     9309 #9128, #9129, #9130, and #9141 (9309 #9125, #9126, #9127, and #9140 must be converted to #9277)

·                     9331 Diskette Units

·                     9332 and 9335 DASD and 9336 Disk Units

o                                            All IBM 9336 Disk Units to be attached to a 9406 D/E/F Model System Unit must have a Control Panel Assembly at an appropriate level to ensure proper operation and integrity. Contact your IBM Service Representative to verify that the 9336 Control Panel Assembly is at the appropriate level. The part number of the 9336 Control Panel Assembly must be other than one of the following part numbers: 92X6832, 92X6856, 92X6883, 92X6965, 92X6977. These modifications are not extensive and must be done prior to attaching the 9336 to the 9406 D, E and F model system units.

·                     2440, 3422, 3430, 3480, 3490, 3490E, 9347, and 9348 tape devices

The 9406 Model D50-D80, E50-E95 and F50-F97 System Units require a system unit expansion. Because of this, when the D35/E35/F35 or D45/E45/F35/F45 is converted to either the E50/F50, E60/F60, E70/F70, E80/F80, E90/F90 or E95/F95/F97, one additional rack must be considered.

National Language Support

Keyboard Support

The 5250-style keyboards supported by the System/36 and System/38 are also supported by the Twinaxial Workstation Controller. Countries that are not listed below do not have a country-unique keyboard that is supported by the local workstation controller. The Twinaxial Workstation Controller will support the following keyboard IDs:

                      122           IBM
                      Typewriter    Enhanced
Country/Language      Keyboard      Keyboard
Arabic X/Basic         239           239
Austrian/Germany       265           129*
Belgian                269           120*
Canadian French        277           058*
Cyrillic               241           241
Denmark                281           159*
Finland/Sweden         285           153*
France                 251           120*
Greece                 218           218
Hebrew                 210           113
Iceland                197           197
Italy                  293           142*
Japan
 (Katakana/Kanji)      694R          694R
Latin America          170           171*
Latin 2                114           114
Netherlands            101           143
Norway                 281N          155*
Portugal               301           163*
Spain                  172           173*
Switzerland
 French                714F          150F*
Switzerland
 German and Italian    714G          150G*
Thailand               ---           190
Turkey                 402           179
United Kingdom         313           168*
United States          101           101G*
Yugoslavia             234           234

* The indicated IBM Enhanced Keyboards are emulated by the ASCII Workstation Controller.

Note: The 122 Typewriter Keyboard is supported on the 3179, 3180, 3196, and 3197 Display Stations. The IBM Enhanced Keyboard is supported on the 3179 (US only), 3196, and 3197 Display Stations.

Code Page Support

The Twinaxial and ASCII Workstation Controller will support the following code pages and character sets:

Country/         EBCDIC   EBCDIC    ASCII
 Language         Code   Character  Code
                  Page      Set     Page***
Arabic X/Basic    420       235     ---
Austria/German    273,
                   500      697     819*, **
Belgium           500       697     819
Canadian/French   500,
                   260      697     819*, **
Chinese
 Simplified       037       697     ---
Chinese
 Traditional      037         697     ---
Cyrillic          880       960     ---
Denmark           277,
                   500      697     819
Finland/Sweden    278,
                   500      697     819
France            297,
                   500      697     819*, **
Greece            423       218     ---
Hebrew            424/2     941/2   ---
Iceland           871,
                   500      697     ---
International     500       697     ---
Italy             280,
                   500      697     819*, **
Japan English     281,
                   500      ---     ---
Japan
 Katakana/Kanji   290       ---     ---
Korea             037       697     ---
Latin America     284,
                   500      697     819*
Latin 2           870       959     ---
Netherlands       037,
                   500      697     ---
Norway            277,
                   500      697     819
Portugal          037,
                   500      697     819
Spain             284,
                   500      697     819*
Switzerland/
 French           500       697     819
Switzerland/
 German and
 Italian          500       697     819
Thailand          838       938     ---
Turkey            905       965     ---
United Kingdom    285,
                   500      697     819*, **
United States     037,
                   500      697     367
Yugoslavia        870       959     ---

* On the 3163 and 3164 displays, the ASCII Code Page is the national language code page, using character set ISO 646 with the addition of the national language characters supported on those displays.

** On the 3101 display, the ASCII Code Page is the national language code page, as supported by that display.

*** Code page 819 is IBM's Code Page of ISO 8859, character set 00697. IBM ASCII displays supported are: 3151, 3161, 3162, 3163, 3164, and 3101-23.

The SNA*ps 5250 Version 1.5 that is used with the direct attachment of Macintosh devices to the AS/400 systems supports the following code pages:

Country/Language     Code Page
US English              037
Multinational           500
Austrian/German         273
Brazilian/Portuguese    037
Danish                  277
Finish                  278
French                  297 (supports French AZERTY and QWERTY)
Italian                 280
Netherlands             037
Norwegian               277
Portuguese              037
Spanish                 284
Spanish Speaking        284
Swedish                 278
English (UK)            285

Technical Description

Physical Specifications

Each 9406 System Unit, System Unit Expansion, or Bus Extension Unit includes a rack enclosure and can accommodate other rack mounted devices. The following specifications describe the 9406 System Unit, System Unit Expansion, or Bus Extension Unit and attached devices installed and the 9309 Model 002 Rack Enclosure with 9406 attached devices installed:

·                     Width: 650mm (25.6 inches)

·                     Depth: 921mm (36.3 inches)

·                     Height: 1,578mm (62.1 inches)

The weight of a populated 9406 System Unit, System Unit Expansion, or Bus Extension Unit or the 9309 Model 002 Rack Enclosure will vary depending on which devices are mounted in the rack enclosure. The maximum weight for a 9406 System Unit, System Unit Expansion, or Bus Extension Unit or the 9309 Model 002 Rack Enclosure is 508kg (1,120 lbs).

Note: An individual 9406 configuration may be made up of multiple rack enclosures.

Operating Environment

The 9406 is intended to be used in a general office environment (e.g., administrative/bookkeeping areas, word processing centers, printer areas, etc.).

·                     Temperature: 10 to 38C (50 to 100F) *

·                     Relative Humidity: 8 to 80 (percent) *

·                     Wet Bulb: 23C (73F)

* When the system contains a 120MB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit (#6366), an 1.2GB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit (#6368), and/or 3422, 3430, 3480, 3490, 3490E, 9347, 9348 Magnetic Tape Units. the temperature range must be 16 to 32C (60 to 90F) and the relative humidity range must be 20 to 80 (percent).

The 3480 and 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystems except for 3490E Models D41 and D42 are intended for use in dedicated computer rooms with or without raised floors. The noise levels exceed those typically associated with equipment installed in a general office environment.

Limitations

·                     AS/400 graphics is not supported on displays, IBM Personal Computers or IBM Personal System/2s attached to the 3174/3274, 5208, 5209 or ROLMbridge 5250.

·                     IBM PC Support/400 is not supported at the system console.

·                     IBM PC Support/400 is not supported for the IBM Personal Computer or IBM Personal System/2s attached to the 5251-12, 5294, 3174/3274, 5208, 5209, or ROLMbridge.

·                     The 1/4-inch tape cartridges from the 6157, a 5363 53MB Internal Streaming Tape Drive (#2605) can be read in the 1/4-inch Cartridge Tape Unit feature (#6366 or #6368) when written in System/36 format. Writing on these tape cartridges is not supported.

·                     ASCII devices attached to a AS/400 may not provide the same response time as 5250 devices. ASCII displays do not have identical keyboards, attributes, character sets, and functions to 5250 displays.

Hardware Requirements

A minimum operable and serviceable 9406 D/E/F model system consists of the following:

·                     9406 System Unit

·                     One System Unit Expansion (#5042) for Models D50 through D80, E50 through E95 and F50 through F97.

·                     One Twinaxial Workstation Controller (#6040, 6050 or #6140), ASCII Workstation Controller (#6041 or #6141) or one Workstation Controller (#6054) (for AppleTalk)

·                     One tape unit/tape subsystem (IBM 2440, 3422, 3430, 3480, 3490 or 3490E (excluding Models B02 or B20 attached via feature #2622), 7208, 9347, 9348, or 9406 feature #6366, #6368,OR #6369

·                     One supported display, as the system console, attached to the Twinaxial Workstation Controller or ASCII Workstation Controller. An Apple Macintosh computer workstation may be utilized as the system con when attached to a Workstation Adapter (for LocalTalk) feature. This display must be located within 6 meters (20 feet) of the rack containing the 9406 system unit. The 9406 system unit operator panel must be viewable from this display.

Note: The following restrictions apply when a terminal connected to an ASCII Workstation Controller is to be used as the system console:

o                                            The terminal must be an IBM 3151, IBM 316X, or equivalent

o                                            The terminal must be attached via an EIA-232-C direct cable to port 0

o                                            See the "ASCII Workstation Reference and Example Manual" (SA41-9922) for additional setup requirements

·                     Although a printer is not required for service, IBM's ability to diagnose the system and perform upgrades is greatly enhanced when a printer is available.

·                     Although not required for hardware service, IBM's ability to service the system is greatly enhanced when a voice telephone is available within view of the system. The telephone must not be connected to phone mail or an answering machine, since the ability to receive calls on this telephone is important in the event support personnel need to reach the Customer Engineer. This telephone line is in addition to the one needed for electronic customer support.

·                     An IBM 5853 or 7855 Modem (or equivalent) is included in the minimum system configuration and is required for electronic customer support.

·                     The AS/400 system units require the appropriate version of AS/400 licensed internal code. The model-unique licensed internal code is delivered on magnetic media with the system unit and with model upgrades. The media used is that required for the device specified as the system alternate IPL device. The licensed internal code may also be preloaded on disk storage.

Software Requirements

OS/400 F model enabler charges are required for new F model.

For new F model systems or for F model MES upgrades of systems using an OS/400 version prior to V2R2:

·                     The 9406 F models require a February 25, 1993 or later distribution of OS/400 Version 2 Release 2 Modification 0.

·                     Version 2 Release 2 Modification 0 cumulative PTF package C3047220 or later, must be applied after installing V2R2.

For F model MES upgrades of systems currently using OS/400 V2R2:

·                     The 9406 models currently at a distribution of OS/400 Version 2 Release 2 Modification 0, earlier than February 25, 1993, need to obtain and apply the no-charge PRPQ 5799-XBP, prior to the hardware upgrade to an F model.

·                     Version 2 Release 2 Modification 0 cumulative PTF package C3047220 or later, must be applied after applying PRPQ 5799-XBP.

Note: DSLO licensed customers should obtain this support from their Basic licensed site.

Electronic Customer Support

An IBM 5853 or 7855 or equivalent modem is required for electronic customer support. The modem must conform to the following technical specifications:

·                     Synchronous operation at 2400bps and 1200bps (5853) or at 9600bps (7855)

·                     Compatibility with V.22bis and/or V.22 at 2400bps, V.32 at 9600bps

·                     Full-duplex on 2-wire switched lines

·                     CCITT V.24/V.28 and EIA-232 interface

·                     CCITT V.24 loop 2 and loop 3 diagnostics

·                     Bit-synchronous (HDLC) V.25bis dialing (pulse, tone, or automatic)

·                     Manual dialing if no V.25bis

The following electronic customer support connectivity is supported:

                        Connectivity Summary
                   for electronic customer support
                                     IBM 5853      IBM 7855
                                     --------      --------
   Switched Line to:
     IBM Service Support System
       via direct dial                2400bps       2400bps*
     IBM LINK via IIN                 2400bps     up to 9600bps
     Remote Q & A via IIN             2400bps     up to 9600bps
   Leased Line to:
     IBM Service Support System
       via IIN                        2400bps     up to 9600bps
     IBM LINK via IIN                 2400bps     up to 9600bps
     Remote Q & A via IIN             2400bps     up to 9600bps
     *  7855 in 5853 compatibility at 2400bps.
The IBM 7855 Modem is an initial system order selectable option
to the IBM 5853 Modem for electronic customer support with all
models of the 9406 system.

Publications

The following publications are shipped with the product. If additional copies are necessary, contact your IBM representative.

·                     SA41-9957 9406 Attaching Workstation and Communications Cables

·                     SY44-3931 9406 Models Bxx-Fxx Problem Analysis

·                     SY44-3932 9406 Models Bxx-Fxx Repair and Parts

·                     SY44-3902 AS/400 Service Functions

·                     SY44-3930 9406 Models Bxx-Fxx Installation and Upgrade

·                     SA41-9922 ASCII Workstation Reference and Example Manual (Shipped with ASCII feature only)

The following publications are available to provide planning information:

·                     SA41-3109 Physical Planning Reference

·                     SA41-3108 Physical Planning Summary

·                     SA41-3100 New Release Planning

·                     GC41-9877 National Language Support Planning Guide

·                     GC41-9623 Migrating from System/36 Planning Guide

·                     GC41-9624 Migrating from System/38 Planning Guide

·                     GC41-9766 System Introduction

·                     GC41-9802 System Concepts

·                     GC41-9678 Publications Guide


Features -- Specify/Special/Exchange

No Charge Specify Codes

Alternate IPL Specify

One of the following specify codes must be entered on the 9406 order to describe which tape drive will be used for the alternate IPL device. The choice should match the type of media that was selected for software distribution.

·                     #5501 - 120MB 1/4-inch Cartridge Tape Unit (#6366)

·                     #5503 - 9347 Tape Unit (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

·                     #5504 - 3490E Models EXX

·                     #5505 - 2440 Tape I/O Subsystem (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

·                     #5507 - 9348 Magnetic Tape Unit

·                     #5508 - 3422 Magnetic Tape Subsystem (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

·                     #5509 - 3430 Magnetic Tape Subsystem (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

·                     #5511 - 3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem

·                     #5512 - 3490E Models C10/C11/C22

·                     #5513 - 3490 A/B/D Models

·                     #5514 - 7208 8mm Tape Drive

·                     #5516 - #6368 1.2GB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit

·                     #5517 - 2.5GB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit

DASD Migration Aids Specify Codes (Withdrawn)

the following specify codes describe the possible configurations:

Specify
Code       Description
#9121      9309-1, 1 9332-400
#9122      9309-1, 2 9332-400s
#9123      9309-1, 3 9332-400s
#9124      9309-1, 4 9332-400s
#9131      9309-2, 1 9335A, 1 9335B
#9132      9309-2, 1 9335A, 2 9335Bs
#9133      9309-2, 1 9335A, 3 9335Bs
#9134      9309-2, 1 9335A, 4 9335Bs
#9135      9309-2, 2 9335As, 3 9335Bs
#9136      9309-2, 2 9335As, 4 9335Bs
#9137      9309-2, 2 9335As, 2 9335Bs
#9138      9332-220 Stand-alone Model
#9139      9332-420 Stand-alone Model

For new systems, the above specify codes should be ordered on the 9406 system order. For installed systems, the codes should be ordered via MES. Ordering these DASD migration specify codes will result in shipment of the appropriate instructions and hardware to install the migration DASD configuration, and will permit the utilization of unused space in migrating DASD racks.

Order Specify Codes

o                                            Mirrored System Specify Codes

§                                                                     #0040 Mirrored System - Disk Unit Level Protection

When added to an initial order, this specify code will cause the order to fail if sufficient DASD is not ordered to support device level mirrored protection. On upgrade orders, a warning message will be generated during installation of the upgrade if sufficient DASD is not available to support device level protection across the system. Available via MES on installed D models. Available from the plant or via MES on installed E and F models.

§                                                                     #0042 Mirrored System - IOP Level Protection

When added to an initial order, this specify code will cause the order to fail if sufficient DASD and IOPs are not included on the order to support IOP level mirrored protection. On Upgrade orders, a warning message will be generated during installation of the upgrade if sufficient DASD devices, controllers and IOPs are not available to support IOP level protection across the system (except internal DASD). Available via MES on installed D models. Available from the plant or via MES on installed E and F models.

§                                                                     #0043 Mirrored System - BUS Level Protection

When added to an initial order, this specify code will cause the order to fail if sufficient DASD, IOPs and System Unit Expansions are not included on the order to support BUS level mirrored protection. On Upgrade orders, a warning message will be generated during installation of the upgrade if sufficient DASD devices, controllers, IOPs and System Unit Expansions are not available to support BUS level protection across the system (except internal DASD). Available via MES on installed D models. Available from the plant or via MES on installed E and F models.

§                                                                     #0044 System Data Loss Protection (RAID)

When added to an initial order, this specify code will cause the order to fail if non-RAID DASD is ordered. On upgrade orders, a warning message will be generated during installation if a RAID capable DASD without RAID enabled is encountered.

·                     Removable Media Device Attachment feature (#2621) device attachment

One of the following specify codes should be used to identify devices other than 9348 which are attached to the Removable Media Device Attachment:

o                                            #0018 2440 Tape Unit Attached to #2621

o                                            #0019 3995 Optical Library Dataserver Attached to #2621

o                                            #0021 7208 Tape Drive Attached to #2621

·                     Tape Migration Specify Codes

The following specify codes describe rack mounted tape drives which can be migrated to a 9406 system:

o                                            #0022 9348 Magnetic Tape Unit

o                                            #0029 9347 Magnetic Tape Unit

o                                            #0028 3490E Models C10, C11 and C22 Magnetic Tape Subsystem

o                                            #0027 3490E Models C10, C11 and C22 shared from another system

For new systems, the above specify codes should be ordered on the system order. For installed systems, the specify codes should be ordered via MES. Ordering these no-charge specify codes will ensure that NO RACK SPACE IS RESERVED for this tape drive in this system.

·                     Complete and Partial Systems.

Every order must include the Complete System specify code (#5520) or the Partial System specify code (#5521). The Complete System specify code must be included on all orders unless the intent is to order an incomplete system. In this case the Partial System code should be used. The Partial System Specify Code causes some of the order validation checking to be bypassed. Partial system orders will not fail validation if device controllers, machines or features required for a complete and operable system are missing. Therefore, it is important that the partial system order accurately list all machines and/or features to be shipped with the 9406. An example of a Partial System order would be an order for a 9406 without a Magnetic Storage Device Controller (#6112) to support a DASD rack.

o                                            #5520 - Complete (Minimum) system order

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of March 31, 1999)

o                                            #5521 - Partial system order

·                     System Console Workstation Controller Specify

When the 9406 order includes a feature code from two of the following three groups, one of the specify codes listed must be entered on the 9406 order to select the type of workstation controller for the system console.

              Controller Groups
                                   Workstation Controller
  Twinaxial          ASCII         (for LocalTalk)
    ----              ----           ----
    6140              6141           6054
    6041              6041
    6050

Specify Codes:

o                                            #5540 System console attached to a Twinaxial Workstation

o                                            #5541 System console attached to a ASCII Workstation Controller

o                                            #5542 System console attached to a Workstation Controller (for LocalTalk)

Machine/MES Tie Codes

This code is used to tie machine orders to dependent MES orders. The unique Tie specify code for that machine and the 9406 system type and system number must be on both the machine order and the dependent MES order. Examples are:

Tie Specify      Machine
Code             Type
#5522            2440 *
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
#5523            9309
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
#5524            9331
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
#5525            9332
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
#5526            9335
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
#5528            9347
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
#5529            9348
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
#5532            3422 *
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
#5533            3430 *
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
#5534            3480 *
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
#5535            3490 *
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)

* For use by all countries other than the United States.

Cabling Specify Codes: Cable and Rack Filler Panel Ordering

Filler Panels

Do not order rack filler panels on initial system orders or on upgrade orders. These panels will be added as required by manufacturing.

Cables

·                     Initial orders

o                                            Complete system orders

It is not necessary to order cables on initial system orders. These will be added as required by Manufacturing.

o                                            Partial System orders

It is not necessary to order cables for machines which will be installed by manufacturing in a rack which is also on the order. Manufacturing will install all machines, except those having the "Do Not Integrate" #9902, in racks if possible.

INTRA-RACK and INTER-RACK cables will be added as required on all machines installed in racks by manufacturing.

Machines will not be installed in racks by manufacturing if:

§                                                                     The machine on order has the "Do Not Integrate" specify code #9902

§                                                                     It cannot be installed in the rack space available in the racks ordered

§                                                                     It cannot be installed because a valid rack type for that machine has not been ordered

For all machines not installed in a rack by Manufacturing, a 2 1/2-meter INTRA-RACK cable will be shipped with that machine unless that machine order has the #9902 "Do Not Integrate" specify code AND a cable specify code identifying the cable to be shipped.

·                     Upgrade orders

o                                            When ordering a 9331-001, 9331-002, 9332-400, 9332-600, 9335-A01, or 9347-001 for field installation in a rack, order a 2 1/2-meter INTRA-RACK signal cable for each machine ordered by adding specify code #9803 to each device order.

o                                            When ordering a 9335-B01 for field installation in a 9309 rack, order a 3 1/2-meter INTRA-RACK signal cable for each machine ordered by adding specify code #9821 to each 9335-B01 order.

o                                            When ordering a 9336-010 or 9336-020 for field installation in a rack and:

§                                                                     a #6112 is included in the order, order a 20-meter signal cable by adding specify code 9807 to each 9336 order.

§                                                                     A #6112 is not included in the order, order a 6-meter INTRA-RACK signal cable by adding specify code 9805 to each 9336 order.

o                                            When ordering a machine(s) for manufacturing installation, in racks that are also on order, do not order INTRA-RACK or INTER-RACK cables. These will be added as required by Manufacturing.

o                                            When a 9332 DASD is to be moved and it is the first DASD to be installed in the rack, order a 20 meter signal cable, P/N 6495256, as a 9332 accessory.

o                                            When ordering a 9309 rack with specify code #9177 to house 9332 DASD moved and no machine is ordered to be installed by Manufacturing in the 9309 rack, order a 20-meter signal cable by adding specify code #9807 to the 9309 rack order.

o                                            When ordering a 9309 rack with specify code #9171 to house 9331 diskette drives moved and no machine is ordered to be installed by Manufacturing in the 9309 rack, order a 20-meter signal cable by adding specify code #9807 to the 9309 rack order.

o                                            When ordering a 9309 rack specify code #9171 to house 9336 Disk Units moved and no machine is ordered to be installed by Manufacturing in the 9309 rack, order a 20-meter signal cable by adding specify code #9807 to the 9309 rack order.

·                     Magnetic Storage Device Controllers

o                                            When ordering additional Magnetic Storage Device Controllers (#6112) to improve DASD/system performance, order one 20 meter DFCI cable P/N 6495256 as a 9332/9335/9336 accessory for each additional controller.

·                     3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment Features

o                                            Not all cables are supplied with the 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment Features #2622 and #2644.

o                                            Maximum supported External Channel cable length is 122 meters (400 ft).

o                                            Maximum Internal Channel cable length is 24 meters (78.7 ft).

o                                            Existing External Channel cables from S/38 or S/370 attachments may be used.

o                                            One channel attachment and appropriate cables must be ordered for each AS/400 to be attached.

o                                            For the 2622:

§                                                                     All attachment is done with External Channel cables.

§                                                                     For the 3430, 3422, 3480 or 3490/3490E Models AXX/BXX tape the External Channel cables must be ordered separately. For cable ordering information see Physical Planning Manual GC22-7064.

§                                                                     For the 3490/3490E Model DXX tape drives a six meter (20 foot) External Channel cable pair can be ordered with the 3490/3490E by specifying feature #9985. If six meter cables are not adequate, see Physical Planning Manual GC22-7064 to order External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables.

§                                                                     The 3490E Model CXX tape drives must be ordered with feature #5037 (parallel channel attachment), feature #9927 (tailgate option, for External Channel (bus/tag) cables) and feature #9985 (six meter (20 foot) External Channel cables). If six meter cables are not adequate, see Physical Planning Manual GC22-7064 to order External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables.

o                                            For the 2644:

§                                                                     Attachment is done with External Channel cables for every device except the 3490E CXX devices where either Internal or External Channel cables can be used.

§                                                                     The #2644 feature requires an IOP Adapter cable, feature #9980, for External Channel cable attachments.

§                                                                     The 3430, 3422, 3480 or 3490/3490E Models AXX/BXX tape drives requires the use of the External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables. The External Channel cables must be ordered separately. For cable ordering information see Physical Planning Manual GC22-7064.

§                                                                     The 3490/3490E Model DXX tape drives requires the use of External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables. A six meter (20 foot) External Channel cable pair can be ordered with the 3490/3490E by specifying feature #9985. If six meter cables are not adequate, see Physical Planning Manual GC22-7064 to order External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables.

§                                                                     Attachment of the 3490E CXX is done with one of two cabling options:

§                                                                                             The Internal Channel cable is the preferred method for distances less than 24 meters. For Internal Channel cables order the 3490E CXX with feature #5037 Parallel Channel attachment and one of the following Internal Channel cables features #9928 a 1.7 meter (5.6ft) cable or #9929 a 6.6 meter (21.7ft) cable or #9930 a 24.0 meter (78.7ft) cable.

§                                                                                             The External Channel Cables when distances greater than 24 meters are required or when External Channel cables are preferred. For External Channel cables order the 3490E Model CXX with feature #5037 Parallel Channel attachment, feature #9927 Tailgate Option for External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables and feature #9985 six meter (20 foot) External Channel cables. If six meter cables are not adequate, see "Physical Planning Manual" (GC22-7064) to order External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables.

Extended Maintenance Option Specify Codes:

·                     8842--Extended Maintenance Option (3 Years)

·                     8843--Extended Maintenance Option (4 Years)

·                     8844--Extended Maintenance Option (5 Years)

Voltage

The 9406 has an input voltage range of 200-240V AC and a frequency range of 50 or 60 Hz without the need for transformer tap changes or other adjustments. A power cord with a non-watertight plug is standard on the 9406 System Unit, System Unit Expansion, Bus Extension Unit, and the 9309 rack enclosure used with 9406. An optional power cord with a water-resistant plug (#9080) is available for raised floor installations in some countries. Please refer to the "AS/400 Physical Planning Guide and Reference", (GA41-9571) for additional information.

No Charge Specify Codes FXX Models

Feat  Price File Name             |                          |Required
Code  (26 Character Limit)        |      FXX                 | OS/400
                                  |35 45 50 60 70 80 90 95 97|Release
----  ----------------------------|-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --|--------
0014  ESP Documentation           |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V2R3
0017  Custom Install - Mirroring  |-  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  - |V1R3
0018  2440 Tape attached to #2621 |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
0019  3995 Opt Libr DataSr Attach |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
0021  7208 Tape attached to #2621 |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
0022  9348 Tape attach to #2621   |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
0023  3490 E-01 Tape Device       |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R3
0025  3490-CXA in other System    |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V2R3
0026  3490-in Tape Library        |S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S |V2R3
0027  3490E C10,C11,C22 other SYS |S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S |V2R1
0028  Migrate 3490E C10,C11,C22   |S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S |V2R2
0029  9347 Tape attach to #6112   |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
0035  9427-210 1c1 scr stnd alon  |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
0036  3490 E-11 Tape Device       |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R3
0039  Locally Sourced 9427-211    |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
0040  Mirrored System Disk Level  |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  BR|V2R1
0042  Mirrored System IOP Level   |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  BR|V2R1
0043  Mirrored System Bus Level   |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V2R2+
0044  Data loss protection        |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V2R3
1310  Sys for redistribution      |S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S |V2R3
2924  English                     |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
2928  French                      |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
2929  German                      |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
2930  Japanese Kanji              |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
2931  Spanish                     |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
2932  Italian                     |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
2935  French Canadian             |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
2962  Traditional Chinese         |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
2969  Korean                      |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
2978  Portuguese                  |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
2979  Brazilian Portuguese        |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
2982  Finnish                     |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
2983  Norwegian                   |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
2987  Swedish                     |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
2988  Dutch                       |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
2993  Danish                      |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
2998  Simplified Chinese          |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
5000  TSP Specify Code            |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
5001  Customer Solution Center    |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |
5002  AS/400 CDSC Roch MFG        |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |
5008  MES FAST PATH               |S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S |
5009  Special Hdling/Sched        |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |
5501  Alt IPL Specify for QIC-120 |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V1R1
5503  Alt IPL Specify for 9347    |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V1R1
5504  Alt IPL Specify 3490 EXX    |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V2R3
5505  Alt IPL Specify for 2440    |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V1R1
5507  Alt IPL Specify for 9348    |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V1R2
5508  Alt IPL Specify for 3422    |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V1R2
5509  Alt IPL Specify for 3430    |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V1R2
5511  Alt IPL Specify for 3480    |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V1R2
5512  Alt IPL Specify for 3490 R  |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V2R2
5513  Alt IPL Specify for 3490    |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V1R2
5514  Alt IPL Specify for 7208    |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V2R1
5516  Alt IPL Specify for QIC-1000|B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V2R2
5517  Alt IPL Specify for QIC-2500|B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V2R3
5520  Complete System Specify     |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
5521  Partial System Specify      |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R1
Order Support Codes
-------------------
S - Supported (Load in price file and withdraw same day)
P - Plant install only
M - MES install only
B - Both Plant and MES install
R - Removal Price Released
No Charge Specify Codes FXX Models, continued.
Feat  Price File Name             Order Support by Model     |Required
Code  (26 Character Limit)        |      FXX                 | OS/400
                                  |35 45 50 60 70 80 90 95 97|Release
----  ----------------------------|-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --|--------
5522  2440 MES Tie Code           |M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M |V1R1
5523  9309 MES Tie Code           |M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M |V1R1
5524  9331 MES Tie Code           |M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M |V1R1
5525  9332 MES Tie Code           |M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M |V1R1
5526  9335 MES Tie Code           |M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M |V1R1
5528  9347 MES Tie Code           |M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M |V1R1
5529  9348 MES Tie Code           |M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M |V1R2
5530  9336 MES Tie Code           |M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M |V1R3
5532  3422 MES Tie Code           |M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M |V1R2
5533  3430 MES Tie Code           |M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M |V1R2
5534  3480 MES Tie Code           |S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S |V1R2
5535  3490 MES Tie Code           |M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M |V1R2
5540  Sys Console on Twinax WSC   |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R2
5541  Sys Console on ASCII WSC    |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V1R2
5542  Sys Console on LocalTalkADPT|B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V2R3
6419  Convert Base Communications |M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M |V2R1
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of November 4, 1994)
9024  Token Ring 802.5 cable 2.44M|B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  BR|V3R1
9025  ETHERNET Cable AUI 3M       |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  BR|V3R1
9080  Power Cord                  |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  BR|V2R1
9081  Locking Power Cord          |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  BR|V2R1
9111  220V, 1 Phase 25 amp, 5KVA  |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  BR|V2R1
9113  380V, 3 Phase 25 amp, 5KVA  |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  BR|V2R1
9114  380V, 3 Phase 10 amp, 4.4KVA|B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  BR|V2R1
9119  Migrated DASD               |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V2R2
9121  9309-1, 1 9332-400          |-  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  - |V1R1
9122  9309-1, 2 9332-400s         |-  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  - |V1R1
9123  9309-1, 3 9332-400s         |-  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  - |V1R1
9124  9309-1, 4 9332-400s         |-  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  - |V1R1
9131  9309-2, 1 9335A,  1 9335B   |-  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  - |V1R1
9132  9309-2, 1 9335A,  2 9335Bs  |-  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  - |V1R1
9133  9309-2, 1 9335A,  3 9335Bs  |-  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  - |V1R1
9134  9309-2, 1 9335A,  4 9335Bs  |-  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  - |V1R1
9135  9309-2, 2 9335As, 3 9335Bs  |-  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  - |V1R1
9136  9309-2, 2 9335As, 4 9335Bs  |-  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  - |V1R1
9137  9309-2, 2 9335As, 2 9335Bs  |-  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  - |V1R1
9138  9332-220 Standalone Model   |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V1R1
9139  9332-420 Standalone Model   |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V1R1
9203  Three EIA Filler Panel      |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V2R1
9204  One EIA Filler Panel        |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V2R1
9205  Five EIA Filler Panel       |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V2R1
9501  1/2 reel MULIC Mod upgrade  |M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M |V2R3
9502  1/2 cart MULIC Mod upgrade  |M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M |V2R3
9503  8 MM     MULIC Mod upgrade  |M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M           |V2R3
9800  640MB Internal Disk Specify |M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M  M |V2R2
9801  2.0GB Internal Disk Specify |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V2R2
9802  2.06GB Internal Disk Specify|P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V2R3+
9814  20FT Antenna Cable wireless |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
9815  50FT Antenna Cable wireless |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
9862  EIA 232/V.24 One line 20E   |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V2R1
9865  EIA 232/V.24 One line 50E   |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V2R1
9879  20FT CCITT V.35 Cable       |MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR|V2R3
9880  80FT CCITT V.35 Cable       |MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR|V2R3
9882  20FT CCITT V.36 RS499 Cable |MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR|V2R3
9883  80FT CCITT V.36 RS499 Cable |MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR|V2R3
9884  150FT CCITT V.36 RS499 Cable|MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR|V2R3
9885  20FT X.21 Cable             |MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR|V2R3
9890  OMNI-Directional  360 Degree|BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
9891  Hemispherical 180 Degree    |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
9892  Directional   90 Degree     |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
9902  Do Not Integrate            |B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B  B |V1R1
9980  3490 Serpentine Cable Conn  |S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S |V1R1
9986  Six Foot Power Cord         |S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S  S |V2R1
Order Support Codes
-------------------
S - Supported (Load in price file and withdraw same day)
P - Plant install only
M - MES install only
B - Both Plant and MES install
R - Removal Price Released

Special Feature Codes -- Chargeable

Optional Features

When ordering features, it is necessary to consider the number of card slots required by the feature and the number of card slots available in each model. The number of main storage slots is fixed for each model, but the number of I/O card slots can be increased by ordering a System Unit Expansion (Models D60/E60/F50/F60, D70/E70/F70, D80/E80/F80, E90/F90 and E95/F95/F97 only) or a Bus Extension Unit. The number of System Unit Expansion and Bus Extension Unit features that can be attached to each model is listed in the description of the System Unit Expansion and Bus Extension Unit features.

When ordering a 9406 using the HONE configurator CFAS400, the card slot count consideration will be handled automatically by the configurator. If the configurator is not used, then the guidance provided in the feature description, and the guidance in the section labeled "Feature Slot Restrictions" should be used to configure a system.

Non-Communications

(#2611) Cluster DASD Controller

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)

This feature provides for the attachment of one 9337 Disk Array Subsystem using a differential SCSI interface. Feature #2611 is available only on 9406 B models and supports all six models of the 9337. Each #2611 controller can attach one 9337 Model 10 or Model 20 with two to seven drives, one 9337 Model 110 or Model 120 with four to seven drives, or one 9337 Model 40 or 140 with four to seven drives. OS/400 Version 2 Release 2 or later is required. Card slots used: One. Maximum: Two on Models B30-B45, five on Model B50 and eight on Models B60-B70. Total DASD capacity cannot exceed that which is currently offered on the same B model today.

(#2620) Cryptographic Processor

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of December 31, 1999)

The Cryptographic Processor feature performs cryptographic functions based on a hardware implementation of the ANSI standard Data Encryption Standard (DES) and the RSA Public Key Algorithm (PKA). (The RSA algorithm was defined by R. Rivest, A. Shamir and L. Adleman.) Cryptographic applications are a cost-effective way of providing confidentiality and/or authentication and integrity assurance for many forms of valuable data. This protection is especially important in networks, which may be vulnerable to unauthorized access to data and resources. Application areas include banking, Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) and protection of proprietary information such as engineering drawings, customer lists, product plans, and personnel records.

Functions provided include encryption and decryption of data, authentication and verification of messages and data, creation and management of financial personal identification numbers (PINs) and management of cryptographic keys. The Public Key Algorithm supports the generation and verification of digital signatures for applications requiring positive electronic authentication of the identity of the sender of a message. The PKA function also provides efficient distribution of encrypted DES cryptographic keys.

Control of the tamper-resistant cryptographic hardware is provided through the supporting PRPQs listed below and optionally, through IBM Personal Security Cards using the IBM 4754-001 Security Interface Unit. The cryptographic functions provided conform to the IBM Common Cryptographic Architecture, are compatible with the IBM Transaction Security System, and interoperate with most DES based cryptographic products including IBM cryptographic products on MVS, RS/6000 (WT only), OS/2 and DOS and the IBM Cryptographic Support/400 licensed program (5728-CR1, 5738-CR1, 5763-CR1). Through its extensive use of industry standards, the cryptographic processor also interoperates with most other DES based cryptographic products.

This feature consists of an I/O processor card with a cable to attach a 4754-001, and a cable wrap connector (1 per system). The 4754-001, if desired, must be ordered separately.

Export authorization from the U.S. Government is required to ship this feature to countries outside the U.S. and Canada. Other countries may also regulate the export of this feature. Export licenses for feature #2620 will generally be approved for shipment to financial institutions and subsidiaries of U.S. companies. Export of feature #2628 may be approved in other cases. Check with your local export regulation coordinator for specific country requirements.

This feature requires the support of OS/400 Version 2 Release 3 and PRPQ 5799-FBR or OS/400 Version 3 Release 1.0 or later, and PRPQ 5799-XBY. PKA functions require OS/400 Version 3 Release 1.0 or later, and PRPQ 5799-XBY. Feature #2620 is not supported by IBM Cryptographic Support/400.

Publications: For additional information refer to the following:

·                     Common Cryptographic Architecture Services/400 Installation and Operator's Guide, SC41-0102

·                     IBM Transaction Security System General Information Manual and Planning Guide, GA34-2137

·                     IBM Transaction Security System Concepts and Programming Guide: Volume I, Access Controls and DES Cryptography, GC31-3937

·                     IBM Transaction Security System Concepts and Programming Guide: Volume II, Public-Key Cryptography, GC31-2889

·                     IBM Transaction Security System Programming Reference: Volume I, Access Controls and DES Cryptography, SC31-2934

·                     IBM Transaction Security System Programming Reference: Volume II, Public-Key Cryptography, SC31-2888

·                     An Implementation Guide to AS/400 Security and Auditing: Including C2, Cryptography, Communications, and PC Connectivity, GG24-4200

Card slots required: One. Maximums: One on all D and later models except 9402 D02 and E02 which do not support this feature.

(#2621) Removable Media Device Attachment

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of June 30, 2000)

This feature provides for attachment of one or two 2440, 7208 or 9348 Magnetic Tape Units in any combination, one 9427 8mm Cartridge Library, one 3995 Compact Optical Library Dataserver Model 042/142 or one #5032 Removable Media Cluster Box. Alternate IPL from attached tape units is supported with this feature.

Hardware Data Compression is available in the attachment for 8mm, 1/4-inch cartridge and 1/2-inch reel-to-reel tape applications. The effective media capacity can be increased by approximately 1.4 times, depending on the data. AS/400 1/2-inch reel-to-reel compressed tapes are compatible with System/38 3422 and 3430 compressed tapes.

Limitations: This feature cannot be installed in the Bus Extension Unit (#5040) when attaching 2440 or 9348 Magnetic Tape units.

Maximums: See the Magnetic Tape Configuration Table for 9406 Models, and 3995 Compact Optical Library Dataserver descriptions.

Cables are not supplied with feature #2621. Refer to the tape drive and Optical Library Dataserver sales manuals for cable information. If the device attached to feature #2621 is other than a 9348, the following order specify codes should be used to identify the removable media device which is attached:

·                     #0018 for 2440 Magnetic Tape Subsystem attached to #2621

·                     #0019 for 3995 Model 042 Compact Optical Library Dataserver

·                     #0021 for 7208 Tape Drive attached to #2621

(#2622) 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)

The 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment provides for attachment of one of the following Magnetic Tape Subsystem Models:

·                     3490E A10/A20/B20/B40

·                     3490E D41/D42

·                     3490E C10/C11/C22/C1A/C2A

·                     3490 A01/A02/B02/B04

·                     3490 D31/D32

·                     3480 A11/B11

·                     3480 A22/B22

·                     3422 A01/B01

·                     3430 A01/B01

Subsystem Attachment supports attachment of up to eight (8) 3490E/3490/3480 tape drives, or up to four (4) 3430/3422 tape drives. This feature provides a hardware data compression function for use with all tape drives listed above. The Hardware Data Compression function (HDC) can increase the effective media capacity by up to two times, depending on the data. AS/400 1/2-inch reel-to-reel compressed tapes are compatible with System/38 3422/3430 compressed tapes.

This feature supports IDRC when used to attach a 3480, 3490 or 3490E Magnetic Tape Subsystem. IDRC can increase the effective media capacity by up to three times, depending on the data. The Hardware Data Compression (HDC) function can be used in conjunction with IDRC in the drive, but does not necessarily result in greater data compression.

The two channel switch feature on the 3422 A01 (#3005) and 3430 (RPQ) may be used with this feature.

Not all cables are supplied with this feature and may need to be ordered separately.

·                     Attachment of the 3430, 3422, 3480 or 3490/3490E Models AXX/BXX tape drives requires the use of External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables. These cables must be ordered separately. For cable ordering information, see "Physical Planning Manual", (GC22-7064).

·                     Attachment of the 3490/3490E model DXX tape drives requires the use of External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables. A six meter (20 foot) External Channel cable pair can be ordered with the 3490/3490E by specifying feature #9985. If six meter cables are not adequate, see "Physical Planning Manual" (GC22-7064) to order External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables.

·                     Attachment of the 3490E model CXX tape drives requires the use of External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables. The 3490E model CXX must be ordered with feature #5037 (parallel channel attachment), feature #9927 (tailgate option, for attaching External Channel (bus/tag) cables) and feature #9985 (six meter (20 foot) External Channel cables). If six meter cables are not adequate, see "Physical Planning Manual" (GC22-7064) to order External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables.

·                     One channel attachment and appropriate cables must be ordered for each AS/400 to be attached.

·                     Maximum supported External Channel cable length is 122 meters (400 ft).

·                     Existing External Channel cables from S/38 or S/370 attachments may be used.

I/O Card Slots Used: One.

Limitations:

·                     The feature #2622 attachment does not support alternate IPL for the 3490/3490E Models B02/B20. If Alternate IPL is required from a 3490/3490E configuration with B02/B20 devices, at least one 3490/3490E B04/B40 tape drive must be included, or attachment #2644 must be used.

·                     The ASSIGN function is not supported by the #2622 attachment during the installation of AS/400 Licensed Internal Code or OS/400 operating system. If the function is required, then attachment #2644 must be used.

·                     The #2622 feature cannot be installed in the Bus Extension Unit (#5040).

·                     Power control is not provided for attached tape drives. The attached tape drives must be operated in "local" power control mode and be manually powered on and off. The 3490E Models C10, C11 and C22 are exceptions since these units are installed in 9406 feature racks (#5040, #5042) or 9309 Model 2 rack Enclosure with either Specify Code #9141 or #9171, where power is controlled by the system.

·                     The following 3480 and 3490 functions are not supported on the 9406:

o                                            Software initiate and message display

o                                            High speed search

o                                            Dynamic device reconfiguration

o                                            IBM 3044 fiber-optic channel extender link Model C02.

o                                            ES Connection* (ESCON*) Channels

·                     The 3490 Shared power controller feature (#9402) is not supported on the 9406.

·                     3480 and 3490 Automatic Cartridge Loader (ACL) is supported in manual or auto mode, not system mode.

·                     The 3480 and 3490 support six basic languages (English, Spanish, German, French, Italian, and Symbolic).

·                     The 3480 and 3490 except for 3490E Models C10, C11, C22, D41 and D42, are intended for use in dedicated computer rooms with or without raised floors. The noise levels exceed those typically associated with equipment installed in a general office area.

Field installation: Yes. Maximums: See the Magnetic Tape Configuration table in the New Device Support section.

(#2644) 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment/HP

The 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment/HP provides for attachment of one of the following Magnetic Tape Subsystem to the 9406 D and E models.

·                     3490E A10/A20/B20/B40

·                     3490E D41/D42

·                     3490E C10/C11/C22/C1A/C2A

·                     3490 A01/A02/B02/B04

·                     3490 D31/D32

·                     3480 A11/B11

·                     3480 A22/B22

·                     3422 A01/B01

·                     3430 A01/B01

The 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment/HP is designed to offer higher performance than feature #2622. The 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment/HP supports attachment of up to sixteen 3490E/3490/3480 tape drives, or up to four 3430/3422 tape drives. This feature provides a hardware data compression function for use with all tape drives listed above. The hardware data compression function can increase the effective media capacity by up to two times, depending on the data. AS/400 1/2-inch reel-to-reel compressed tapes are compatible with System/38 3422/3430 compressed tapes. This feature supports IDRC when used to attach a 3480, 3490 or 3490E Magnetic Tape Subsystem. IDRC can increase the effective media capacity by up to three times, depending on the data. The Hardware Data Compression (HDC) function can be used in conjunction with IDRC in the drive, but does not necessarily result in greater data compression.

The two channel switch feature on the 3422 A01 (#3005) and 3430 (RPQ) may be used with this feature.

This feature supports alternate IPL from all 3490 or 3490E models, including B02 and B20. Also, the ASSIGN function of the 3480, 3490 and 3490E Magnetic Tape Subsystem is supported during the installation of AS/400 Licensed Internal Code and OS/400 operating system.

Not all cables are supplied with this feature and may need to be ordered separately.

·                     Attachment of the 3430, 3422, 3480 or 3490/3490E Models AXX/BXX tape drives requires the use of the External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables. The #2644 feature requires an IOP Adapter cable, feature #9980, for External Channel cable attachments. The External Channel cables must be ordered separately. For cable ordering information see Physical Planning Manual GC22-7064.

·                     Attachment of the 3490/3490E Model DXX tape drives requires the use of External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables. The #2644 feature requires an IOP Adapter cable, feature #9980, for External Channel cable attachments. A six meter (20 foot) External Channel cable pair can be ordered with the 3490/3490E by specifying feature #9985. If six meter cables are not adequate, see Physical Planning Manual GC22-7064 to order External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables.

·                     Attachment of the 3490E CXX tape drive requires one of the following:

o                                            The Internal Channel cable is the preferred method for distances less than 24 meters. For Internal Channel cables order the 3490E CXX with feature #5037 Parallel Channel attachment and one of the following Internal Channel cables features #9928 a 1.7 meter (5.6ft) cable or #9929 a 6.6 meter (21.7ft) cable or #9930 a 24.0 meter (78.7ft) cable.

o                                            The External Channel Cables when distances greater than 24 meters are required or when External Channel cables are preferred. The #2644 requires feature #9980 for an IOP Adapter cable. For External Channel cables order the 3490E model CXX with feature #5037 Parallel Channel attachment, feature #9927, Tailgate Option for External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables and feature #9985, Six meter (20 foot) External Channel cables. If six meter cables are not adequate, see Physical Planning Manual GC22-7064 to order External Channel (Bus/Tag) cables.

·                     One channel attachment and appropriate cables must be ordered for each AS/400 to be attached.

·                     Maximum supported External Channel cable length is 122 meters (400 ft).

·                     Existing External Channel cables from S/38 or S/370 attachments may be used.

I/O Card Slots Used: One.

Limitations:

·                     This feature cannot be installed in the Bus Extension Unit (#5040)

·                     Power control is not provided for attached tape drives. The attached tape drives must be operated in "local" power control mode and be manually powered on and off. The 3490E Models C10, C11 and C22 are exceptions since these units are installed in 9406 feature racks (#5040, #5042) or 9309 Model 2 rack Enclosure with either Specify Code #9141 or #9171, where power is controlled by the system.

·                     The following 3480 and 3490 functions are not supported on the 9406:

o                                            Software initiate and message display

o                                            High speed search

o                                            Dynamic device reconfiguration

o                                            IBM 3044 fiber-optic channel extender link Model C02.

o                                            ES Connection* (ESCON*) Channels

·                     The 3490 Shared power controller feature (#9402) is not supported on the 9406.

·                     3480 and 3490 Automatic Cartridge Loader (ACL) is supported in manual or auto mode, not system mode.

·                     The 3480 and 3490 support six basic languages (English, Spanish, German, French, Italian, and Symbolic).

·                     The 3480 and 3490 except for 3490E Models C10, C11, C22, D41 and D42, are intended for use in dedicated computer rooms with or without raised floors. The noise levels exceed those typically associated with equipment installed in a general office area.

Field installation: Yes. Maximums: See the Magnetic Tape Configuration table in the New Device Support section.

(#2801) 1.97GB Internal Disk Unit

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of September 29, 1995)

This feature provides additional internal DASD with a capacity of 1.97GB. When combined with the base 1.97GB, maximum internal DASD capacity on F models is 3.95GB. Both the base and optional 1.97GB Internal Disk Units consist of two 988MB disk drives and two access arms.

The most significant benefit of the internal DASD on the 9406 is the ability to enable a main storage dump to be taken in the event of an external power failure. Some users of smaller 9406 models will find the increased internal DASD capacity sufficient for their total storage requirements and may not need additional external DASD devices and controllers.

Up to two #2801 features are supported on 9406 D and E models and F models without #9801. For systems with two existing 640MB Internal Disk Units, one #2801 can replace one or both of these units. CFAS400 will be adding two #9800 specify codes to installed D and E models on any MES activity to identify the existing 640MB Internal Disk Units. If one #2801 is to replace only one 640MB Internal Disk Unit and two #9800s are not on the installed inventory, one #9800 must be ordered with the #2801.

(#2802, #9802) 2.06GB Internal Disk Unit

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1997)

This feature provides additional internal DASD with a capacity of 2.06GB. When feature #2802 is combined with the standard base 2.06GB (specify code #9802), the maximum internal DASD capacity on F models is 4.12GB.

A significant benefit of the internal DASD on the 9406 is the ability to enable a main storage dump to be taken in the event of an external power failure. Some users of smaller 9406 models will find the increased internal DASD capacity sufficient for their total storage requirements and may not need additional external DASD devices and controllers.

New 9406 F models will be shipped with one #9802 2.06GB Internal Disk Unit Specify in the base. One #2802 may be added to D, E and F models.

Main Storage

The main storage features are plugged into main storage card slots within the 9406. The number of slots available in each model is as follows:

·                     D35/E35/F35 - Two

·                     D45/E45/F45 - Two

·                     D50/E50/F50 - Five

·                     D60/E60/F60 - Five

·                     D70/E70/F70 - Five

·                     D80/E80/F80 - Five

·                     E90/F90 - Five

·                     E95/F95 - Five

·                     F97 - Five

(#3119) 8MB Main Storage

The 8MB Main Storage card is available for the Models D35, E35, F35, D45 and E45. It may be used in any combination with main storage features #3100 and #3101 provided the available number of main storage card slots is not exceeded. Main Storage Card Slots Used: One.

(#3100) 16MB Main Storage

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

The 16MB Main Storage card is available for the Models D35, E35, F35, D45 and E45. It may be used in any combination with main storage features #3119 and #3101 provided the available number of main storage card slots is not exceeded. Main Storage Card Slots Used: One.

(#3101) 32MB Main Storage

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

The 32MB Main Storage card is available for the Models D35, E35, F35, D45 and E45. It may be used in any combination with main storage features #3119 and #3100 provided the available number of main storage card slots is not exceeded. Main Storage Card Slots Used: One.

(#3102) 16MB Main Storage

The 16MB Main Storage card is available for the Models D50, D60, E60, D70, D80, E50, and F50. It may be used in any combination with main storage features #3103 and #3104 provided the maximum main storage capacity or available number of main storage card slots is not exceeded. Main Storage Card Slots Used: One.

(#3103) 32MB Main Storage

The 32MB Main Storage card is available for the Models D50, D60, D70, D80, E50, E60 and F50. It may be used in any combination with main storage features #3102 and #3104 provided the maximum main storage capacity or available number of main storage card slots is not exceeded. Main Storage Card Slots Used: One.

(#3104) 64MB Main Storage

The 64MB Main Storage card is available for the Models D50, D60, D70, D80, E50, E60, F50 It may be used in any combination with main storage features #3102 and #3103 provided the maximum main storage capacity or available number of main storage card slots is not exceeded. Main Storage Card Slots Used: One.

(#3130) 32MB Main Storage

The 32MB Main Storage card is available for the Models E70, E80, E90, E95 and F60. It may be used in any combination with the main storage features #3131 and #3132 provided the maximum main storage capacity or the available number of main storage card slots is not exceeded. Main Storage Card Slots Used: One.

(#3131) 64MB Main Storage

The 64MB Main Storage card is available for the Models E70, E80, E90, E95 and F60. It may be used in any combination with the main storage features #3130 and #3132 provided the maximum main storage capacity or the available number of main storage card slots is not exceeded. Main Storage Card Slots Used: One.

(#3132) 128MB Main Storage

The 128MB Main Storage card is available for the Models E70, E80, E90, E95 and F60. It may be used in any combination with the main storage features #3130 and #3131 provided the maximum main storage capacity or the available number of main storage card slots is not exceeded. Main Storage Card Slots Used: One.

(#3133) 64MB Main Storage

The 64MB Main Storage card is available for the Models F70, F80, F90, F95 and F97. It may be used in any combination with the main storage feature #3134 provided the maximum main storage capacity or the available number of main storage card slots is not exceeded. Main Storage Card Slots Used: One.

(#3134) 128MB Main Storage

The 128MB Main Storage card is available for the Models F70, F80, F90, F95 and F97. It may be used in any combination with the main storage feature #3133 provided the maximum main storage capacity or the available number of main storage card slots is not exceeded. Main Storage Card Slots Used: One.

(#3135) 256MB Main Storage

The 256MB Main Storage card is available for the Models F70, F80, F90, F95 and F97. It may be used in any combination with the main storage features #3133 and #3134, provided the maximum main storage capacity or the available number of main storage card slots is not exceeded. Main Storage Card Slots Used: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be used on 9406 B, D and E models or Models F35 through F60.

(#3136) 256MB Main Storage Card

This memory feature card can be ordered to increase maximum memory on the E90 and E95 to 1024MB and 1152MB respectively. This feature is available only via MES for Models E90 and E95. OS/400 Version 2 Release 3 is required.

(#3140) 8MB Main Storage

The 8MB Main Storage card is available for the Model F45. It may be used in any combination with the main storage features #3141 and #3142 provided the maximum main storage capacity or the available number of main storage card slots is not exceeded. Main Storage Card Slots Used: One.

(#3141) 16MB Main Storage

The 16MB Main Storage card is available for the Model F45. It may be used in any combination with the main storage features #3140 and #3142 provided the maximum main storage capacity or the available number of main storage card slots is not exceeded. Main Storage Card Slots Used: One.

(#3142) 32MB Main Storage

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

The 32MB Main Storage card is available for the Model F45. It may be used in any combination with the main storage features #3140 and #3141 provided the maximum main storage capacity or the available number of main storage card slots is not exceeded. Main Storage Card Slots Used: One.

(#8135) Optional Base 256MB Main Storage

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

This main storage card is available only on the 9406 Model F97. It provides 256MB of base main storage in place of the standard 128MB card and must be used to achieve the maximum main storage on the Model F97. Feature #8135 is available via MES for installed systems only. Card slots used: One. Maximum: One.

Memory/Internal DASD Dependencies

Additional internal DASD will be required, to allow room for main storage dumps, as the 512MB point is exceeded. The following chart shows what specific internal DASD configurations are required as memory is increased.

Main Store              F model DASD
Size in MBs             Rqmts in MB
---------               ----------
   576                     1392
   640                     1527
   704                     1661
   768                     1795
   832                     1929
   896                     2064
   960                     2198
  1024                     2332
  1088                     2466
  1152                     2618
  1216                     2735
  1280                     2869
  1344                     3003
  1408                     3137
  1472                     3272
  1536                     3406

Memory Feature Summary Chart

Memory           Memory
Feature Codes    Size        9406 Models
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #3119       |    8MB    |  D35, D45, E35, E45, F35
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #3100       |   16MB    |  D35, D45, E35, E45, F35
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #3101       |   32MB    |  D35, D45, E35, E45, F35
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #3102       |   16MB    |  D50, D60, D70, D80, E50, E60, F50
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #3103       |   32MB    |  D50, D60, D70, D80, E50, E60, F50
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #3104       |   64MB    |  D50, D60, D70, D80, E50, E60, F50
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #3130       |   32MB    |  E70, E80, E90, E95, F60
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #3131       |   64MB    |  E70, E80, E90, E95, F60
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #3132       |  128MB    |  E70, E80, E90, E95, F60
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #3133       |   64MB    |  F70, F80, F90, F95, F97
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #3134       |  128MB    |  F70, F80, F90, F95, F97
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #3135       |  256MB    |  F70, F80, F90, F95, F97
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #3136       |  256MB    |  E90, E95
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #3140       |    8MB    |  F45
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #3141       |   16MB    |  F45
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #3142       |   32MB    |  F45
---------------------------------------------------------------
  #8156       |  256MB    |  F97
---------------------------------------------------------------
qsp

Main Storage Considerations

The new 256MB Main Storage feature (#3135) allows the maximum main storage on the high-end models to be increased. These increases relieve constraints, especially in the multiprocessor environment, where there is a high degree of paging to disk. On those systems where DASD I/O is a bottleneck and where CPU cycles are available, customers may elect to add main storage to increase the advantage of the "Expert Cache" function provided in OS/400 V2R3.

Optimizing Main Storage Configurations for Multiprocessor Systems

In an 9406 F model multiprocessor system, there are two important factors that should be considered regarding the relationship between the main storage and the system processors. When these factors are met, the 9406 models F80, F90, F95 and F97 processor performance will be optimum assuming that no other bottlenecks exist. (This discussion does not apply to E or earlier models.)

For the 9406 F model multiprocessors, the first and most important factor is card interleaving. Interleaving is the implementation of an addressing scheme that allocates space across four main storage cards of the same size (in MB) installed in the first four main storage slots.

With interleaving enabled, address space increments, in 512-byte pages, from one card to the next (e.g, first page on card one, second page on card two, etc) rather than filling one card entirely before going on to the next card. This card interleaving reduces main storage contention in a multiprocessor environment by spreading across four cards (rather than one) the frequently accessed operating system functions that are resident in the lower address range. Interleaving is enabled when the system is IPL'd and the four cards in the first four slots are all the same size (have the same MB of main storage).

The second factor to be considered in this relationship is the number of main storage cards installed. Just like DASD arms, more is better. The system processors take advantage of all main storage cards installed in the system by keeping multiple cards active in parallel. Any one of the system processors can issue a command across the main storage interface to, or receive data from any one of the main storage cards.

The table below lists the main storage sizes (in MB, under the "TOTAL" column) and the corresponding main storage feature configurations that may maximize the performance of main storage access by multiple F model processors. The "optimal" result is reached by having four main storage cards of the same size AND all main storage slots full.

The table DOES NOT show actual placement by main storage slot.

 Base    Feat    Feat    Feat    Feat    Feat    Total    Result
------  ------  ------  ------  ------  ------  ------    ---------------
  128                                             128
  128      64                                     192
  128      64      64                             256
  128      64      64      64                     320
  128      64      64      64      64             384     Interleave Only
  128      64      64      64      64      64     448     Optimal
  128     128      64      64      64      64     512     Optimal
  128     128     128     128      64             576     Interleave Only
  128     128     128     128      64      64     640     Optimal
  128     128     128     128     128      64     704     Optimal
  128     128     128     128     128     128     768     Optimal
  128     128     128     128     256      64     832     Optimal
  128     128     128     128     256     128     896     Optimal
  128     128     128      64     256     256     960     All Slots Full
  128     128     128     128     256     256    1024     Optimal
  128     128      64     256     256     256    1088     All Slots Full
  128     256     256     256     256            1152     Interleave Only
  128     256     256     256     256      64    1216     Optimal
  128     128     256     256     256     256    1280     Optimal

Actual system performance varies from one customer to another depending on the job mix, system tuning and the potential for other bottlenecks. For example, if the system is I/O bound or has low processor utilization, then main storage configuration may not affect F model system performance.

More technical information is available in the Chapter "Architecture, Design, and Performance of Multiprocessors" beginning on page 132 of the January 1992 Edition of the "IBM Application System/400 Technology Journal" (S325-6020).

Limitations: The following 9406 I/O card features cannot be installed in the I/O Card Units (#5030 or #5031):

·                     #2601 9346 Magnetic Tape Controller (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of November 4, 1994)

·                     #2602 2440 Tape I/O Subsystem Attachment Feature Card (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of November 4, 1994)

·                     #2604 3422, 3430 Magnetic Tape Attachment Feature (For IBM US, withdrawn from marketing as of March 20, 1995)

·                     #2605 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Basic Rate Interface Adapter

·                     #2607 9348 Magnetic Tape Attachment Feature (For IBM US, withdrawn from marketing as of March 20, 1995)

·                     #2608 2440/9348 Data Compression/Decompression Tape Attachment (For IBM US, withdrawn from marketing as of March 20, 1995)

·                     #2617 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Adapter/HP

·                     #2619 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter/HP

·                     #2621 Removable Media Device Attachment

·                     #2622 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment

·                     #2623 Six-Line Communications Controller

·                     #2625 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD LAN Adapter

·                     #2626 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter/A

·                     #2636 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter

·                     #2644 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment/HP

·                     #6110 Magnetic Storage Device Controller (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of November 4, 1994)

·                     #6111 Magnetic Storage Device Controller (For IBM US, withdrawn from marketing as of March 20, 1995)

·                     #6112 Magnetic Storage Device Controller

·                     #6050 Twinaxial Workstation controller

·                     #6140 Twinaxial Workstation Controller

·                     #6141 ASCII Workstation Controller

·                     #6500 Direct Access Storage Device Controller

·                     #6501 Direct Access Storage Device Controller

·                     #2664 - Integrated FaxAdapter

·                     #6516 - 16MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #6517 - 32MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #6518 - 48MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #6519 - 64MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #6526 - 16MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #6527 - 32MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #6528 - 48MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #6529 - 64MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #2663 - I/O Attachment Processor

The following 9406 features cannot be attached to a 9406 via an I/O Card Unit (#5030 or #5031):

·                     #5031 I/O Card Unit for D, E and F Model Attachment

·                     #5040 Bus Extension Unit

I/O Card Slots Used: One. Field Installation: Yes. Maximums: One #5031 per 9406. Up to three I/O Card Units (one #5031 or #5030 with #8505 and up to two #5030s) per system I/O bus reduced by the number of Bus Extension Units (#5040) on the same system I/O bus.

Prerequisite: One or more rack configurations capable of mounting an I/O Card Unit must be included in the system and space must be available within the racks to mount the I/O Card Unit. See the Rack Configurations section for further detail regarding these rack configurations.

(#5032) Removable Media Cluster Box

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of June 30, 1996)

The Removable Media Cluster Box is a rack mounted feature box which is used on the 9406 D, E and F models to attach one to four additional 1.2GB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Units (#6368). Four slots are available, allowing for operation of multiple 1.2GB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Units.

A single Removable Media Device Attachment (#2621) is used to support attachment of up to four tape units. OS/400 Version 2 Release 2 is required.

(#5040) Bus Extension Unit

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)

The Bus Extension Unit provides 11 additional card slots to an existing I/O bus and is available on D E and F models. The Bus Extension Unit includes a rack enclosure and provides additional space for rack mounted 9331, 9332, 9336, 9337, 9347, and 9348 devices and an I/O Card Unit (#5030 or #5031). Standard features include an uninterruptible power supply interface and a battery power unit which is capable of keeping all feature I/O cards in the bus extension unit (except those in a I/O Card Unit) powered for up to five minutes. The following features can be attached to the 9406 D/E/F models using the Bus Extension Unit:

·                     #2617 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Adapter/HP

·                     #2618 Fiber Distribution Data Interface Adapter

·                     #2619 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter/HP

·                     #1620 Encryption Attachment

·                     #2621 Removable Media Device Attachment when used to attach a 3995 Optical Library Dataserver

·                     #2623 Six-Line Communications Controller

·                     #2625 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD LAN Adapter

·                     #2626 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter/A

·                     #2628 Limited Encryption Attachment (WT only)

·                     #2636 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter

·                     #2665 Shielded Distributed Data Interface Adapter

·                     #2666 High Speed Communications Adapter

·                     #5030 I/O Card Unit with feature #8505

·                     #5031 I/O Card Unit for D, E or F Models

·                     #5040 Bus Extension Unit

·                     #2664 - Integrated FaxAdapter

·                     #6516 - 16MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #6517 - 32MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #6518 - 48MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #6519 - 64MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #6526 - 16MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #6527 - 32MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #6528 - 48MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #6529 - 64MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #2663 - I/O Attachment Processor

·                     #6050 Twinaxial Workstation controller

·                     #6140 Twinaxial Workstation Controller

·                     #6141 ASCII Workstation Controller

For maximum flexibility in adding tape and DASD to the system, it is recommended that the allowed System Unit Expansion features (#5042) be added to Models D60, D70, D80, E60, E70, E80, E90, E95, F50, F60, F70, F80, F90, F95 and F97 before adding Bus Extension Units.

When the first Bus Extension Unit is attached to a system I/O bus, an I/O card slot is required in the 9406 D/E/F Model System Unit or in a System Unit Expansion. I/O Card Slots Used in 9406 D/E/F model: One slot on a system I/O bus is required when the first Bus Extension Unit is added. Adding a second Bus Extension Unit on the same bus requires an additional slot in the first Bus Extension Unit on the same bus. Limitations: No Bus Extension Units can be attached to a system I/O bus when an I/O Card Unit (#5030 or #5031) is attached directly to the System Unit or System Unit Expansion. Field Installation: Yes. Maximums: Two Bus Extension Units per system I/O bus reduced by the number of I/O Card Units (#5030 or #5031), greater than one, on the same system I/O bus.

(#5042) System Unit Expansion

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

The System Unit Expansion feature is a 12 card slot expansion unit available for Models D50 through D80, E50 through E95 and F50 through F97. This feature provides two additional I/O buses with six I/O card slots per bus and attaches to the system unit via a laser-driven fiber optic attachment cable. A minimum of one System Unit Expansion feature is required on Models D50-D80, E50-E95 and F50-F97. A second System Unit Expansion feature can be added to Models D60, D70, E60, E70, F50 and F60. A second and third System Unit Expansion feature can be added to Models D80, E80 through E95 and F70 through F97. The System Unit Expansion feature includes a rack enclosure and provides additional space for rack mounted 9331, 9332, 9336, 9337, 9347, and 9348 devices and I/O Card Units (#5030 and #5031). Standard features include an uninterruptible power supply interface and a battery power unit which is capable of keeping all feature I/O cards in the System Unit Expansion powered for up to five minutes. (Except those installed in a #5030 or #5031)

The following features can be attached to the 9406 D/E/F model using the System Unit Expansion:

·                     #2617 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Adapter/HP

·                     #2618 Fiber Distributed Data Interface Adapter

·                     #2619 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter/HP

·                     #2620 Encryption Attachment

·                     #2621 Removable Media Device Attachment

·                     #2622 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment

·                     #2623 Six-Line Communications Controller

·                     #2625 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD LAN Adapter

·                     #2626 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter/A

·                     #2628 Limited Encryption Attachment (WT only)

·                     #2636 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter

·                     #2644 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment/HP

·                     #2665 Shielded Distributed Data Interface Adapter

·                     #2666 High Speed Communications Adapter

·                     #5030 I/O Card Unit with feature #8505

·                     #5031 I/O Card Unit for D/E/F Models

·                     #5040 Bus Extension Unit

·                     #2664 - Integrated FaxAdapter

·                     #6516 - 16MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #6517 - 32MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #6518 - 48MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #6519 - 64MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #6526 - 16MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #6527 - 32MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #6528 - 48MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #6529 - 64MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #2663 - I/O Attachment Processor

·                     #6050 Twinaxial Workstation controller

·                     #6112 Magnetic Storage Device Controller

·                     #6140 Twinaxial Workstation Controller

·                     #6141 ASCII Workstation Controller

·                     #6500 Direct Access Storage Device Controller

·                     #6501 Direct Access Storage Device Controller

For maximum flexibility in adding tape and DASD to the system, it is recommended that the allowed System Unit Expansion features (#5042) be added to Models D60, D70, D80, E60, E70, E80, E90, E95, F50, F60, F70, F80 F90 and F97 before adding Bus Extension Units (#5040).

A 10 meter fiber optic bus attachment cable is provided with the first System Unit Expansion on the system. A 20 meter fiber optic bus attachment cable is provided with each subsequent System Unit Expansion feature added to the system. A power control cable is also included with the System Unit Expansion feature. I/O Card Slots Used in 9406 D/E/F model: None. Field Installation: Yes. Minimums: D50-D80, E50-E95, F50-F97 - One. Maximums: D50/E50 - One, D60/E60/F50/F60 - Two, D70/E70 - Two, D80/E80/E90/E95/F70/F80/F90/F95/F97 - Three.

Longer fiber optic cables are available to provide increased placement flexibility, but these cables require configuration assistance from the Mirroring Support Center in Rochester. Refer to the "Information Only" RPQ #841958 for more details.

(#6112) Magnetic Storage Device Controller

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)

This feature card provides the disk, diskette and tape controller/adapter function. It attaches to an I/O bus in the system unit or System Unit Expansion feature and provides attachment of various devices. The interface is IBM's implementation of the ANSI IPI-3 industry standard.

The controller will provide attachment for the following IBM devices:

·                     9331-001 8-inch Diskette Unit

·                     9331-002 5 1/4-inch Diskette Unit

·                     9332-200 Direct Access Storage Device (only supported when migrated from S/36, S/38, or 9406 B model)

·                     9332-400 Direct Access Storage Device

·                     9332-600 Direct Access Storage Device

·                     9335-A01 Device Function Controller

·                     9335-B01 Direct Access Storage Device

·                     9336-010 Disk Unit

·                     9336-020 Disk Unit

·                     9336-025 Disk Unit

·                     9347-001 Tape Unit

The maximum number of devices that can be attached to a Magnetic Storage Device Controller is as follows:

Device                Devices per Magnetic
 Type               Storage Device Controller
------              -------------------------
9331                            2
9332                            8 *
9335-A01                        4
9335-B01                        8
9336                            2
9347 **                         2
*  The number of 9332s per Magnetic Storage Device Controller must
be reduced when 9331s and/or 9347s are attached to the same
Magnetic Storage Device Controller.  One less 9332 can be attached
for each 9331 or 9347 attached.
** A dedicated Magnetic Storage Device Controller (#6112) is required
for a 9347 used as the alternate IPL device on Models D50/E50/F50
through D80/E95/F95/F97.

Note: All DASD or disk units attached to a single Magnetic Storage Device Controller must be of the same type.

See the table at the end of the Disk Unit IOP descriptions to determine the number of IOPs for external DASD supported by system.

When ordering a 9406 using the HONE configurator, CFAS400, the number of #6112s needed will be determined by the configurator. If the configurator is not used, then the number of #6112s needed can be determined by the following guidelines:

·                     When 9332 DASD is included in the system:

o                                            Order one #6112 for each one to eight 9332 DASD attached to the system.

o                                            If 9331s or 9347s are included in the system, use the following to determine if an additional #6112 is required:

1.                                                                  Determine the number of #6112s required for each one to eight 9332 DASD.

2.                                                                  Add the number of 9332s and 9331s and 9347s divide the total by eight. If the result is greater than the number of #6112s required for each one to eight 9332s, then order one #6112 to control the 9331s and 9347s.

3.                                                                  If a 9347 is the alternate IPL device on a Model D50/E50/F50 through D80/E95/F95, the #6112 to which it attaches cannot be used for attaching DASD, but can attach diskette.

o                                            If 9336 Disk Units are included in the system, it is not necessary to order an additional #6112 when installing 9331s and 9347s in the system

·                     When 9335 DASD is included in the system:

o                                            Order one #6112 for every two 9335 DASD Racks (9309 Specify Code #9128) attached to the system.

o                                            Order one #6112 for every four 2440 Tape I/O Subsystems with 9335 DASD, mounted in the 2440, attached to the system.

o                                            If 9331s or 9347s are included in the system, order one #6112 to control these devices if there are no 9336 Disk Units included in the system, or if a 9347 is used as the system alternate IPL device.

·                     When 9336 Disk Units are included in the system:

o                                            Order one #6112 for each one to two 9336 Disk Units attached to the system.

o                                            It is not necessary to order an additional #6112 if 9331s and 9347s are included in the system, unless the 9347 is the alternate IPL device for Models D50/E50/F50 through D80/E95/F97, in which case the 9347 cannot be attached to the same #6112 used to attach DASD. It can be attached with diskette.

·                     When migrating 9332/9335 DASD to a 9406 System:

o                                            Order one #6112 for each two racks of 9335 DASD being migrated (Specify Code #9119).

o                                            Order one #6112 for each one to eight 9332 DASD being migrated (Specify Code #9119). (include 9331s and 9347 in this number if no 9336s are included in the system)

o                                            Order one #6112 for the 9347 if it is being used as the alternate IPL device on Models D50/E50/F50 through D80/E95/F97. (The 9347 used for alternate IPL can be attached to a #6112 with diskette, but not DASD.)

In certain circumstances it may be desirable to have additional controllers. Refer to the DASD Performance Guidelines and Cables sections for additional information.

(#6500) Direct Access Storage Device Controller

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)

This feature provides for attachment of one 9337 Disk Array Subsystem per #6500 controller using a differential SCSI interface. Feature #6500 is available on 9406 D, E and F models, and supports 9337 Models 010, 110, 015, 115, 020, 120, 025, 125, 040, 140. OS/400 Version 2 Release 2 or later is required. Card slots used: One. System maximums for storage device controller (#6500): Six on Models D35, E35, F35, D45, E45 and F45; nine on Models D50 and E50; 16 on Models F50, D60, E60, F60, D70 and E70; 28 on Models F70, D80, E80, F80, D90, E90, F90, E95, F95 and F97.

See the table at the end of the Disk Unit IOP descriptions to determine the number of IOPs for external DASD supported by system.

(#6501) Tape/Disk Device Controller

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 2001)

This feature is an I/O processor that is used to attach external tape devices and DASD using SCSI interface.

On 9406 D, E and F models, feature #6501 provides attachment for the 3490 Models E01 and E11 1/2-inch Cartridge Tape Subsystem. Each feature #6501 can attach up to two SCSI interface tape devices. The maximum number of tape devices supported is dependent on the system type and the number of other external tapes attached.

On the 9406, feature #6501 is also used to attach 9337 Disk Array Subsystems. Mixing tape devices and DASD devices on the same controller is not allowed. The maximum number of feature #6501s used to support tape is as follows: One on Models D35, D45, E35, E45, F35 and F45. Two on Models D50-D80, Models E50-E95 and F50-F97. Card slots required: One.

IOPs for External DASD Supported by System

The following table shows the number of IOPs for external DASD supported by system.

System model       #6112, #6500, 6501
                   IOPs for External DASD
--------------     ------------------------
D35, D45            6 Total
E35, E45              3 Maximum per bus
F35, F45
-------------------------------------------
D50                 9 Total
E50                   1 maximum on bus 0
                      4 Maximum per bus other than bus 0
-------------------------------------------
D60, D70            16 Total
E60, E70              1 Maximum on bus 0
F50, F60              4 Maximum per bus other than bus 0
-------------------------------------------
D80                 28 Total
E80, E90, E95         1 maximum on bus 0
F70 - F97             5 maximum per bus other than bus 0

One additional #6112 is added to maximum for AIPL tape device attached on bus 0.

Two additional buses may be added to the Models F50/D60/E60/F60 and D70/E70 by adding a System Unit Expansion (#5042). Two to four additional buses may be added to the Models F70, D80/E80/F80, E90/F90 and E95/F95/F97. by adding one or two System Unit Expansions (#5042). I/O Card Slots Used: One. Limitations:

·                     Cannot be installed in the Bus Extension Unit (#5040).

Field Installation: Yes. System Maximums: See chart.

DASD IOPs must be installed in the 9406 system unit or feature #5042. For systems larger than two buses (Model X50 and above), no more than one DASD I/O Processor may be installed on bus 0 and for optimum performance, none should be installed on bus 0 as the chart below indicates. A maximum of three DASD I/O Processors may be installed on any bus. Exceptions to this rule are:

·                     On D50 and E50 systems with three buses, up to four IOPs driving disk units may be placed on any bus except bus 0.

·                     On D60, D70, E60, D70, F50 and F60 systems with five buses, up to four IOPs driving disk units may be placed on any bus except bus 0.

·                     On D80, E80, E90, E95, F70, F80, F90, F95 and F97 with seven buses, up to 5 IOPs driving disk units may be placed on any bus except bus 0. System maximum of 28 IOPs.

The above exceptions to the rule of three disk driving IOPs per bus applies only after the MAXIMUM number of buses allowed on that particular system has been reached (e.g., a F70 installation must have all seven buses installed before exceeding three disk driving IOPs per bus).

(#6050) Enhanced Twinaxial Workstation Controller

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of May 31, 2001)

This enhanced, combined workstation controller and adapter offers higher performance and more on-card memory than feature #6140. One eight-port workstation attachment is provided to support up to 40 additional 5250-type displays or printers with a maximum of seven devices per port. This controller contains additional memory which allows support of the graphical 5250 display data stream extensions and entry field 5250 display data stream extensions. The #6050 workstation controller supports customizing of keyboard translation and printer definition tables. Both SCS and IPDS data streams are supported. OS/400 Version 2 Release 2 or later is required to support this feature. I/O Card Slots Used: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: The system console must be attached to the first #6050, #6140, or #6141 which must reside on the first system I/O bus or in a Bus Extension Unit attached to that bus. Maximums: See Workstation Controller Table.

(#6054) Workstation Adapter

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of March 31, 1997)

The #6054 Workstation Adapter feature provides an alternative workstation attachment architecture to the currently supported twinaxial and ASCII interfaces. The Workstation Adapter feature is supported on all 9406 D, E and F models.

LocalTalk(1) networking was developed by Apple Computer, Inc., to connect multiple local workstations via an easily configurable bus network. Physically, each workstation is connected to the LocalTalk shielded twisted-pair cable network by a connector box. A LocalTalk network can support up to 32 devices. Devices include Macintosh personal computers, Macintosh printers which attach to the network, LocalTalk compatible devices and the IBM Workstation Adapter feature. The maximum length of a LocalTalk network is 300 meters (988 feet). The maximum speed of the LocalTalk network is 230.4Kbps.

LocalTalk workstation networking is supervised by portions of the AppleTalk protocol. OS/400 Version 2 Release 3 or later supports attached devices as local 5250 workstations. The program, SNA*ps 5250 Emulator Version 1.2, is required on the Macintosh workstation. Although each network can physically connect 32 devices, including the Workstation Adapter, the recommended performance limitation is 20 active sessions.

The Workstation Adapter feature is packaged on a standard daughter card and attaches to the Six-Line Communications Controller (#2623). Each Workstation Adapter feature is shipped with a connector box and a two-foot cable, used to attach it to a LocalTalk cable network.

When attached to the Six-Line Communications Controller feature, #6054 supports attachment of an Apple Macintosh as the system console. On the 9406, feature #5542 must be ordered with #6054.

One Workstation Adapter is supported on the Six-Line Communications Controller. A second adapter on the controller may only be an X.21, EIA 232/V.24 or V.35 communication adapter. The third of three adapter positions must not be used. X.25 is limited to 32 virtual circuits total for the Six-Line Communications Controller.

The number of #6054 features supported by model is listed in the following table:

            #2623
           Attached    Maximum     Maximum
Model       #6054       #6054      Workstations
-----     ---------   ---------    ---------
F35          12          12          372
F45          18          18          558
F50          25          25          775
F60          35          35         1085
F70          60          60         1860
F80          60          60         1860
F90          60          60         1860
F95          60          60         1860
F97         120         120         3720
(#6140) Twinaxial Workstation Controller

This feature is a combined workstation controller and a workstation adapter for attaching 5250 type displays and printers as well as Link Protocol Converters to the system.

The controller attaches to the I/O bus. A 20-foot cable is used to connect the controller to an external box that provides eight ports for attaching twinaxial devices. Both the 20-foot cable and the external box are included as part of this feature. The external box may be floor, wall or table-mounted. Up to 40 5250 type displays or printers are supported, with a maximum of seven devices attached per port. It will support both SNA Character String (SCS) and Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS) printer data streams. Feature #6140 supports customizing of keyboard translation and printer definition tables when running with OS/400 Version 2 Release 2. I/O Card Slots Used: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: The system console must be attached to the first #6140 or #6141 which must reside on the first system I/O bus or in a Bus Extension Unit or I/O Card Unit attached to that bus. Maximums: See Workstation Controller Table

             Maximum Number of Twinaxial Workstation Controllers
                 F35   F45   F50   F60   F70   F80   F90   F95   F97
                 ---   ---   ---   ---   ---   ---   ---   ---   ---
Twinaxial:
 Controllers   0-12   0-18  0-25  0-35  0-60  0-60  0-60  0-60  0-120
 Workstations   480    720  1000  1400  2400  2400  2400  2400  4800
(#6141) ASCII Workstation Controller

The ASCII Workstation Controller is a combined work station controller and a workstation adapter for attaching selected ASCII displays and printers to the 9406. The ASCII Workstation Controller can support up to 18 ASCII devices. A six-port workstation attachment is supplied with the ASCII controller. Feature #6141 supports customizing of keyboard translation tables when running with OS/400 Version 2 Release 2. I/O Card Slots used: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: The system console must be attached to the first #6140 or #6141 which must reside on the first system I/O bus or in a Bus Extension Unit or I/O Card Unit attached to that bus. Host graphics are not supported on devices attached to this controller. (See Note.) Maximums: See Workstation Controller Table.

(#6142) ASCII 12-Port Workstation Attachment

The 12-port Workstation Attachment attaches to the ASCII Work Station Controller and provides an additional 12 ports to the six ports provided with the ASCII Workstation Controller. I/O Card Slots used: None. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Host graphics are not supported on devices attached to this controller. Maximums: One per ASCII Workstation Controller (#6141). (See Note.) Note: With IBM PC Support/400, a graphics-capable DOS-base PC can be attached to the ASCII workstation controller and use host graphics; (i.e., it is transparent to the ASCII WSC, it is just passing data between BGU and the DOS PC.)

Either EIA 232 (CCITT V.24/V.28) or EIA 422-A (CCITT V.11) interfaces are supported from any of the ASCII ports at speeds up to 38,400bps. For specific information about these interfaces see the "Physical Planning Guide and Reference" (GA41-9571) and the "ASCII Workstation Reference and Example Manual" (SA41-9922). The EIA 422-A interface allows local attachment of devices from up to 4,000 feet (1200 meters). The EIA 232 interface allows local attachment of devices from up to 50 feet (15 meters) or remote attachment via modems. Devices are supported via point-to-point asynchronous duplex modems that may be switched or nonswitched at speeds up to 19,200bps. The data buffering capability of asynchronous modems or multiplexors is not supported.

The following IBM modems (or equivalent) are supported in asynchronous mode:

·                     5811-20

·                     5812-10

·                     5841

·                     5842

·                     5853

·                     IBM PC Convertible Internal and Enhanced Internal Modem.

Workstation Controller Table

The maximum number of Workstation Controllers (ASCII and/or Twinaxial) that can be attached to a 9406 System Unit are as follows:

    Model     Model     Model     Model     Model       Model     Model
     F35       F45       F50       F60       F70      F80 - F95    F97
   -------   -------   -------   -------   -------   ------------ -----
     12         18        25        35        60           60      120

One Twinaxial Workstation Controller (#6140) or (#6040 when a B model is upgraded to a D, E or F model) or one ASCII Work Station Controller (#6141) or (#6041 when a B model is upgraded to a D, E or F model) is required to attach a console. When the 9406 order includes both a Twinaxial Workstation Controller (#6140) and an ASCII Workstation Controller (#6141), one of the following specify codes must be entered on the 9406 order to select the type of workstation controller the system console will be attached to:

·                     #5540 System console attached to a Twinaxial Workstation Controller

·                     #5541 System console attached to an ASCII Workstation Controller

(#6366) 120MB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of November 4, 1994)

The 120MB 1/4-inch cartridge tape unit may be used for data interchange, migration, save/restore, and alternate IPL. Full interchange of 120MB media (QIC-120) is supported with all of the standard and optional 1/4-inch cartridge tape unit features provided on the AS/400 9402 and 9404 system models, the IBM 9346 1/4-inch Cartridge Tape Unit feature on the 9406 B models, and the 120MB High Capacity Internal Streaming Tape Drive (feature #2675) on the 5363 or AS/Entry 5363 Systems. The 120MB 1/4-inch Cartridge Tape Unit attaches to the 9406 D, E and F models via the standard Multi-Function I/O Processor and is mounted in a slot inside the system unit. The 120MB 1/4-inch Cartridge Tape Unit is supported on the 9406 F models but is not orderable on the F models. Maximum: See Magnetic Tape Configuration Table.

The IBM 6150 Data Cartridge, P/N 21F8588, or equivalent, is required to support the QIC-120 density format for maximum unattended capacity. The 120MB device can read IBM DC6157 cartridges and cartridges written on the 5363 53MB internal tape drive (feature #2605) when written in the System/36 format.

The IBM 0.25 Cleaning Cartridge Kit, P/N 21F8570 provides necessary head cleaning capability for the 120MB 1/4-inch Cartridge Tape Unit.

(#6368) 1.2GB 1/4-inch Cartridge Tape Unit

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of June 30, 1996)

The 1.2GB 1/4-inch cartridge tape drive is a low cost, high-function, streaming tape drive for the AS/400 system. It may be used for save/restore, alternate IPL, program distribution, migration, and 1/4-inch Cartridge tape interchange. This device requires OS/400 Version 2 Release 2 or later support.

Full interchange of data is supported with all the standard and optional 1/4-inch cartridge tape units provided on the AS/400 9402, 9404 and 9406 models, using the proper media and density.

The 1.2GB 1/4-inch Cartridge Tape Unit supports the following media and formats:

·                     Read and write up to 1.2GB of data at 36Kbpi density on IBM DC9120 Data Cartridge media with error correction capability incorporated into the data.

·                     Read and write up to 525MB of data at 16Kbpi density on IBM DC6525 Data Cartridge media with error correction capability incorporated into the data.

·                     Read and write up to 120MB of data at 10Kbpi density on IBM DC6150 or IBM DC6525 Data Cartridge media.

·                     Read data written on media from the IBM 6157 tape unit or the 5363 53MB internal tape drive (feature #2605) when written in the System/36 format.

The 1.2GB 1/4-inch Cartridge Tape Unit has an effective data rate of 300KB per second when operating in the 1.2GB format, 200KB per second when operating in the 525MB format, and 90KB per second when operating in the 120MB format.

The 1.2GB 1/4-inch Cartridge Tape Unit attaches to the D, E and F models of the 9406 system via the standard Multi-Function I/O Processor and is mounted in a slot inside the system unit. It also attaches via the Removable Media Device Attachment and mounts in one of the four slots in the rack mounted Removable Media Cluster Box (feature #5032).

Hardware Data Compression (HDC) is supported in the I/O Processor attachments on all 9406 D, E and F models, allowing approximately 1.4 times compression of the data. The IBM 0.25 Cleaning Cartridge P/N 46G2675 (US and Canada), P/N 8191177 (outside of US and Canada), provides the necessary head cleaning capability for the 1.2GB 1/4-inch Cartridge Tape Unit.

(#6369) 2.5GB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

The 2.5GB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit is a low cost, high-function, streaming tape drive for AS/400 systems. It may be used for save/restore, alternate IPL, program distribution, migration, and 1/4-inch cartridge tape interchange. The 2.5GB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit records data in the QIC-2GB format. This device requires support of OS/400 Version 3 Release 0.5.

Full interchange of data is supported with all the standard and optional 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Units provided on the AS/400 9402, 9404, and 9406 models, using the proper media and density.

The 2.5GB 1/4-inch Cartridge Tape Unit supports the following media and formats:

·                     Read and write up to 2.5GB of data in QIC-2GB format on IBM DC9250 Data Cartridge media with error correction capability incorporated into the data.

·                     Read and write up to 1.2GB of data in QIC-1000 format on IBM DC9120 Data Cartridge media with error correction capability incorporated into the data.

·                     Read and write up to 525MB of data in QIC-525 format on IBM 6525 Data Cartridge media with error correction capability incorporated into the data.

·                     Read and write up to 120MB of data in QIC-120 format on IBM 6150 or IBM 6320 Data Cartridge media.

·                     Read data written on media from the IBM 6157 Tape Unit or the 5363 53MB Internal Tape Drive (feature #2605) when written in the System/36 (QIC-24) format.

The 2.5GB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit has an effective data rate of 300KB per second when operating in the QIC-2GB or QIC-1000 formats, 200KB per second when operating in the QIC-525 format and 120KB per second when operating in the QIC-120 format.

Features supported - 9406:

Feature #6369 is the optional 2.5GB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit for placement in the System Unit. Up to four #6369 can be installed in a #5032 cluster box. This feature is available only via MES to all installed 9406 D, E and F models.

(#8505) I/O Card Unit Conversion Feature

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of November 4, 1994)

This feature provides a card assembly to attach an I/O Card Unit (#5030), which was previously installed on a 9406 B model, to a D/E/F model System Unit, System Unit Expansion or Bus Extension Unit. See the description of I/O Card Unit for D/E/F models attachment (#5031) for additional information. I/O Card Slots used: One. Field Installation: Yes. Maximums: One per I/O Card Unit being attached. Prerequisites: An installed I/O Card Unit (#5030) and 9406 D/E/F model system unit, System Unit Expansion, or Bus Extension Unit.

Communications

Communications Functions

The 9406 offers a wide variety of communications and connectivity functions. Multiple networks, SNA, X.25, X.21, Token-ring, FDDI, Ethernet/IEEE 802.3, ISDN and Frame Relay are available with connectivity provided by multiple protocols: ASYNC, BSC, SDLC, IDLC, X.25, and the X.21 Short Hold Mode/ Multiple Port Sharing function. Multiple environments are also available: AS/400 as a host to personal computers and other AS/400s, System/36s and System 38s, AS/400 as a peer system to other AS/400s, System/36s, System/38s and other IBM peer systems; and AS/400 as a remote system in a System/370 controlled network.

Using appropriate T1 (US), E1 (Europe) or J1 (Japan) DCE (multiplexor or DSU/CSU), the 9406 supports SDLC data lines at speeds up to 2.048 Mbps.

The 9406 will communicate via the EIA 232/V.24 and V.35 adapters through a 9751 CBX, ROLM CBX 8000 and ROLM CBX 9000 using Data Comm Module (DCM). Additionally, a Data Terminal Interface (DTI) is supported for EIA 232/V.24 asynchronous connections through the ROLM CBX 8000 and ROLM CBX 9000.

The following is a list of current IBM systems and modems that may be attached to the 9406:

·                     IBM Systems

o                                            AS/400, 9402, 9404, 9406

o                                            3090, 308x, 43xx, 9370, System/390, ES/9000

o                                            System/36, System/38, RS/6000, Series/1,System/88

o                                            Personal Computers XT*, XT-286, AT**, Personal System/2* and 6150 RT

·                     IBM Modems

o                                            3833, 3834, 3863, 3864, 3865, 3868, 7861, 7868

o                                            5811, 5812

o                                            5821, 5822, 5841, 5842, 5853, 7855 (US only)

o                                            5865, 5866, 5868

Communications Controllers and Adapters

Hardware communications controllers and line adapters, available as standard and optional features on the 9406, provide for the attachment of public and private communications facilities to the 9406 using modem equipment. Each line adapter is comprised of an adapter card and communications cable for modem attachment. The line adapters are installed on the communications controller. Each Six-Line Communications Controller plugs into an I/O card slot of the 9406 System Unit, System Unit Expansion (#5042), or Bus Extension Unit (#5040). The Multi-Function I/O Processor has an integrated two-line controller function as a standard feature of the 9406 System Unit.

The number of Six-Line Communications Controllers that can be installed depends on the number of I/O card slots available and the following limitation:

Maximum Communications Lines by Model

                                                          Max    Max
                                                         #2623  other
             Total   Total      Max T1/E1/J1 Lines (3)     +    High Spd
             Comm    High Spd         <  or =            #2666  Lines
Model        Lines   Lines      384Kbps 512Kbps 640Kbps   (2)    (1)
--------     -----   --------   ------- ------- -------  -----  --------
F35           20         6          6       6       4      4       6
F45           33         6          6       6       4      4       6
F50           33         8          8       8       4      4       8
F60           33        10          10      8       4      4      10
F70           64        24          24     16       8      8      24
F80/F90       64        24          24     16       8      8      24
F95           64        24          24     16       8      8      24
F97           96        24          24     16       8      8      24

Notes:

1.                  These are X.21/V.35/ISDN lines which support BSC, X.25, IDLC and SDLC at speeds greater than 19.2Kbps up through 64Kbps. An ISDN adapter is counted as two lines when determining the number of lines supported.

2.                  This is the combined number of #2666 and #2623 features supporting T1/E1/J1 speeds.

3.                  The Six-Line Communications Controller (#2623) supports up to three V.35 SDLC data lines for attachment to T1/E1/J1 facilities through appropriate Data Communications Equipment (DCE). Per controller (#2623) support:

o                                            One V.35 SDLC data line operating at speeds up to 640Kbps

o                                            Two V.35 SDLC data lines operating at speeds up to 512Kbps

o                                            Three V.35 SDLC data lines operating at speeds up to 384Kbps

Communications Controllers

Multi-Function I/O Processor

The Multi-Function I/O Processor and one EIA 232/V.24 one-line communications adapter are standard on the 9406 Model D, E and F System Unit. In addition to internal DASD and the 1.2GB 1/4 inch tape unit, the Multi-Function I/O Processor supports two communication lines.

The standard EIA 232/V.24 one-line adapter is provided for use with the IBM electronic customer support facility on the first communication line. This adapter is equipped with an enhanced cable that provides attachment to an IBM 5853, 7855 or equivalent modem. The first line supports switched line facilities operating at 2,400bps or 9,600bps using SDLC protocol. Electronic customer support leased facilities may operate at speeds up to 19,200bps on the first line; 9,600bps using the IBM 7855 modem. Specify cable length for EIA 232/V.24 adapter standard feature:

·                     #9862 for EIA 232/V.24 enhanced cable (20 foot)

·                     #9865 for EIA 232/V.24 enhanced cable (50 foot)

A remote power-on capability, which allows the system to be powered on via a telephone call to the IBM 5853 or 7855 electronic customer support modem, is supported only on the first line. V.32 modems other than the IBM 7855 modem have not been tested and may not operate with the remote power-on capability.

The maximum aggregate data rate of the Multi-Function I/O processor for its two communications lines is 83,200bps. The concurrent operation of ASYNC, BSC, SDLC and X.25 protocols is supported. ASYNC, BSC and X.25 line speeds up to 19,200bps are supported. SDLC line speeds are supported up to 64Kbps. (X.25 line speeds and full duplex ASYNC line speeds should be doubled for calculating aggregate line speed.

Select one EIA 232/V.24, X.21 or V.35 one-line adapter for an additional line:

The following MFIOP communications limits apply to all models:

·                     X.25 support:

o                                            Up to 16 Virtual Circuits

o                                            Up to 1 K frame size/packet size

·                     SDLC support:

o                                            Up to 4 controllers (per line)

o                                            Modulus 8 (allows up to 7 unacknowledged frames)

(#2623) Six-Line Communications Controller

The Six-Line Communications Controller is an optional feature of the 9406 D/E/F Model System Unit and is an input/output processor that provides the basic control and common circuits for up to six communication lines. The concurrent operation of ASYNC, BSC SDLC, and X.25 protocols; and the SDLC X.21 Short Hold Mode function is supported. A per controller maximum of ninety-six X.25 virtual circuits is supported with a maximum of 64 virtual circuits on any line. X.21, V.35 and EIA 232/V.24 adapters are supported. ISDN is also supported but may not attach to a Six-Line Communications Controller that contains EIA 232/V.24, X.21, or V.35 adapters.

One Workstation Adapter (for LocalTalk) is supported on the Six-Line Communications Controller. A second adapter on the controller may only be an X.25, EIA 232/V.24 or V.35 communications adapter. The third adapter position must not be used. X.25 is limited to a maximum of 32 virtual circuits when it shares a Six Line Communications Controller with a LocalTalk Workstation Adapter.

Using appropriate Data Communications Equipment (DCE) which multiplexes one or more V.35 lines onto a T1/J1 line (1.544Mbps digital link) or E1 line (2.048Mbps digital link), up to three V.35 SDLC data lines per Six-Line Communications Controller are supported for attachment to T1/E1/J1 DCE.

Per controller support:

·                     One V.35 SDLC data line operating at speeds up to 640Kbps.

·                     Two V.35 SDLC data lines each operating at speeds up to 512Kbps.

·                     Three V.35 SDLC data lines each operating at speeds up to 384Kbps.

EIA 232/V.24, X.21, ISDN adapter type, and V.35 lines operating BSC or X.25 protocols are not supported for concurrent operation with V.35 SDLC data lines using T1/E1/J1 DCE on the same controller. Additional Six-Line Communications Controllers may need to be ordered for V.35 SDLC data lines using T1/E1/J1 DCE.

The aggregate line speed per controller for anything other than V.35 SDLC data lines using T1/E1/J1 DCE is 384Kbps. (Double full duplex line speeds when calculating aggregate line speeds. Full duplex is standard for X.25 lines and may be required for ASYNC lines.)

Up to 4 controllers attaching V.35 data lines using T1/E1/J1 DCE are supported on the 9406 D35 to D70, E35 to E70 and F35 to F70 models. Up to 8 controllers attaching V.35 SDLC data lines using T1/E1/J1 DCE are supported on 9406 Models D80, E80 to E95 and F80 to F97. Card slots used: one.

Communications Adapters

(#6154, #6174, #6155, #6175) EIA 232/V.24 One-Line Adapters

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

Each feature consists of an adapter and cable used to support one communication line using either ASYNC, BSC, SDLC or X.25 protocol. Line speeds up to 19,200bps using ASYNC, BSC or SDLC protocol and up to 9,600bps using X.25 protocol are supported. This adapter attaches to the Multi-function I/O Processor. Card slots used: None. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Multi-function I/O Processor.

Select feature number for adapter and required cable:

·                     #6154 for adapter plus EIA 232/V.24 enhanced cable (20 foot)

·                     #6174 for adapter plus EIA 232/V.24 enhanced cable (50 foot)

(#6154 and #6174 are not recommended for use with modem equipment that has the "signal quality detect" feature.)

·                     #6155 for adapter plus EIA 232/V.24 cable (20 foot).

·                     #6175 for adapter plus EIA 232/V.24 cable (50 foot).

(#6155 and #6175 are recommended for use with any modem eliminator or the modem that has a feature known as "signal quality detect" and does not implement CCITT /V.54 loop 2 and loop 3 tests on interface pins 21 and 18.)

(#2654, #2655, #2657, #2658) EIA 232/V.24 Two-Line Adapters

(For IBM US, #2654, #2655, #2657 No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

This feature consists of an adapter card, one 10 foot two-connector stub cable and two communication cables used to support two communication lines using ASYNC, BSC, SDLC and X.25 protocols. Line speeds up to 19,200 are supported. This adapter attaches to the Six-Line Communications Controller. Card slots used: none. Maximum: Three per Six-Line Communications Controller. Prerequisite: Six-Line Communications Controller. Select feature number for adapter and required cables:

·                     #2654 for adapter plus two EIA 232/V.24 enhanced cables (20 foot)

·                     #2657 for adapter plus two EIA 232/V.24 enhanced cables (50 foot)

(#2654 and #2657 are not recommended for use with modem equipment that has the "signal quality detect" feature.)

·                     #2655 for adapter plus two EIA 232/V.24 cables (20 foot)

·                     #2658 for adapter plus two EIA 232/V.24 cables (50 foot)

(#2655 and #2658 are recommended for use with any modem eliminator or modem that has a feature known as "signal quality detect" and does not implement CCITT /V.54 loop 2 and loop 3 tests on interface pins 21 and 18.)

(#6151, #6171) X.21 One-Line Adapters

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

Each feature consists of an adapter and cable used to attach one communication line to an X.21 or X.25 network. Line speeds up to 19,200bps using SDLC protocol and up to 9,600bps using X.25 protocol are supported. This adapter attaches to Multi-function I/O processor. Card slots used: None. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Multiple function I/O Processor.

Select feature number for adapter and required cable:

·                     #6151 for X.21 adapter and one X.21 cable (20 foot).

·                     #6171 for X.21 adapter and one X.21 cable (50 foot).

(#2656, #2659) X.21 Two-Line Adapters

(For IBM US, #2656 No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

This feature consists of an adapter, one 10 ft two-connector stub cable, and two communication cables used to support two communication lines to an X.21 or X.25 network. Line speeds up to 64Kbps are supported using SDLC and X.25 protocols and using the X.21 short hold mode function. This adapter attaches to the Six-Line Communications Controller. Card slots used: None. Maximum: Three per Six-Line Communications Controller. Prerequisite: Six-Line Communications Controller. Select feature number for adapter and required cables:

·                     #2656 for adapter plus two X.21 cables (20 foot)

·                     #2659 for adapter plus two X.21 cables (50 foot)

(#6153, #6173) V.35 One-Line Adapters

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

Each feature consists of an adapter and cable that is used to support one communication line. Line speeds up to 64Kbps using BSC, SDLC and X.25 are supported. Only the SDLC protocol is supported when attached to the 9406 Multi-function I/O processor. This adapter attaches to the Six-Line Communications Controller and the Multi-function I/O processor. Card slots used: None. Maximum: Three on the Six-Line Communications Controller and One on the Multi-function I/O processor. Prerequisite: Six-Line Communications Controller or Multi-function I/O processor.

Select feature for V.35 adapter and required V.35 Cable:

·                     #6153 for adapter and V.35 cable (20 ft)

·                     #6173 for adapter and V.35 cable (50 ft)

640Kbps SDLC Data Line Support:

Using appropriate T1/E1/J1 Data Communication Equipment (DCE) (multiplexor or DSU/CSU), the Six-Line Communications Controller (#2623) with attached V.35 One-Line adapters (#6153,#6173) supports SDLC data lines at speeds up to:

·                     640Kbps each for one V.35 SDLC line per controller

·                     512Kbps each for two V.35 SDLC lines per controller

·                     384Kbps each for three V.35 SDLC lines per controller

Four Six-Line Communications Controllers used for T1/E1/J1 DCE attachment are supported for 9406 Models D35 to D70, E35 to E70 and F35 to F70. Eight are supported for the 9406 Models D80, E80, F80, E90, F90, E95, F95 and F97.

64Kbps Switched V.35 SDLC Support:

Using appropriate Data Communications Equipment, the MFIOP and the Six-Line Communications Controller(#2623) with attached V.35 One-Line Adapters(#6153 and #6173) supports switched line SDLC capability at speeds up to 64Kbps. This support is available with Version 3 Release 1 of OS/400.

(#2605) Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Basic Rate Interface Adapter

This feature consists of an adapter card and 20-foot cable used to attach the system to an ISDN network. Each adapter supports two 64Kbps 'B' channels and one 16Kbps 'D' channel. ISDN lines are full duplex. This adapter attaches to the prerequisite Six-Line Communications Controller. A maximum of two ISDN adapters are supported per Six-Line Controller. The ISDN Data Link Control (IDLC) protocol is supported.

Attachment of X.25 Packet Switched Networks is also supported using an ISDN B channel as the access facility. The AS/400 will support two X.25 network access types:

·                     Circuit Mode - This ISDN network is used to access an X.25 PSN

·                     Packet Mode - The ISDN network provides X.25 (Based on offerings of the network provider)

Up to 4096 byte packets are supported.

Card slots used: none. Maximum: Two per Six-Line Communications Controller. Prerequisite: Six-Line Communications Controller. Limitations: This adapter does not attach to a Six-Line Communications Controller that also attaches EIA 232/V.24, X.21 or V.35 adapters. Refer to the AS/400 Communications: Integrated Service Digital Network Guide Version 2 SC41-0003 for additional information.

Attachment of X.25 Packet Switched Networks is also supported using an ISDN B channel as the access facility. The AS/400 will support two X.25 network access types:

·                     Circuit Mode - This ISDN network is used to access an X.25 PSN

·                     Packet Mode - The ISDN network provides X.25 (Based on offerings of the network provider)

Combination Controller/Adapters

(#2666) High Speed Communications Adapter

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

This feature provides the AS/400 system with one communications port capable of T1/J1 (1.544Mbps) or E1 (2.048Mbps) speeds. Communication over public or private Frame Relay or X.25 Networks or over point-to- point non-switched SDLC lines is possible. Feature #2666 consists of a card, a wrap connector and Licensed Internal Code. Three physical interface types are offered for connection to external Data Communications Equipment (DCE) such as Data Service Units (DSU), Channel Service Units (CSU) or multiplexers, which in turn provide connection to the communication facilities.

The physical interfaces are:

·                     CCITT V.36/EIA 449 at speeds up to 2.048Mbps

·                     CCITT X.21 at speeds up to 2.048Mbps

·                     CCITT V.35 at speeds up to 2.048Mbps

The cable type plugged into the adapter and OS/400 configuration parameters determine which of the three interfaces will be used. One of the following cables must be specified when ordering feature #2666:

·                     #9879 6 meter (20 foot) CCITT V.35 cable (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

·                     #9880 24.4 meter (80 foot) CCITT V.35 cable (see note 1) (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

·                     #9882 6 meter (20 foot) CCITT V.36/EIA 449 cable (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

·                     #9883 24.4 meter (80 foot) CCITT V.36/EIA 449 cable (see note 2) (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

·                     #9884 45.7 meter (150 foot) CCITT V.36/EIA 449 cable (see note 2) (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

·                     #9885 6 meter (20 foot) CCITT X.21 cable (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

Note 1: Use of this 24.4 meter (80 foot) V.35 cable restricts the maximum line speed to 64Kbps.

Note 2: Use of these longer cables requires that the attaching Data Communications Equipment (DCE) support the V.36 transmitter signal element timing Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) source signal.

If, after initial installation a change of interface type or cable length is desired, a separate cable may be ordered.

The High Speed Communications Adapter supports Frame Relay, X.25 or SDLC protocols. The specific protocol to be used is selected by OS/400 configuration commands. The Frame Relay, X.25 or SDLC code is then loaded into the adapter when the line is enabled.

The Frame Relay code load supports up to 256 permanent virtual circuits on the 9406, through one physical port. The virtual circuits can be individually configured for the following types of connections:

·                     Frame Relay Network link direct to other devices

·                     Frame Relay Network link bridged to remote Token-Ring, IEEE 802.3, Ethernet Version 2, FDDI or SDDI LANs

·                     non-switched communications direct link to other systems

·                     non-switched communications bridged link to remote Token-Ring, IEEE 802.3, Ethernet Version 2, FDDI or SDDI LANs

Logical Link Control (LLC) IEEE 802.2/ISO 8802.2 Type I (connectionless) and Type II (connection-oriented) services, provided by the Frame Relay code, allow TCP/IP and SNA sessions over these connections. Source Route Bridging function allows products on a remote Token-Ring, FDDI or SDDI LAN to communicate with the AS/400 through a remote bridge. Transparent Bridging is employed for the remote Ethernet and IEEE 802.3 LAN connections. AS/400 feature #2666 interoperates with IBM RouteXpander/2 and the IBM 6611 Network Processor for bridged connections to remote Token-Ring LANs. Interoperation with the IBM 6611 also provides a bridged connection to remote IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet Version 2 LANs. TCP/IP Forum RFC 1490 (Request For Comment - Multiprotocol Connect over Frame Relay) defines the industry standard formats used to facilitate this bridged interoperation. Support of these formats allows the High Speed Communications Adapter to also interoperate with other industry standard bridges.

Frame Relay Standards: Frame Relay functions of the High Speed Communications Adapter feature are implemented in accordance with these standards:

·                     ANSI T1.606 Architecture Framework

·                     ANSI T1.606 Addendum 1 Congestion Management

·                     ANSI T1.617 Signaling for Frame Relay Bearer Service

·                     ANSI T1.618 Core Aspects of Frame Relay Protocol for Frame Relay Bearer Service

·                     CCITT Recommendation I.233 Frame Mode Bearer Services

·                     CCITT Recommendation Q.922 Annex A Common Protocols

·                     CCITT Recommendation Q.933 User to User Control

·                     CCITT Recommendation I.370 Congestion Management

·                     RFC 1490 Multiprotocol Connect Over Frame Relay

The SDLC code load supports non-switched communications over any of the three possible interfaces (V.35, V.36/EIA 449 or X.21).

The X.25 code load supports up to 64 virtual circuits over any of the three possible interfaces (V.35, V.36/EIA 449 or X.21).

Frame Relay and SDLC functions require OS/400 Version 2 Release 3 or later. X.25 function requires OS/400 Version 3 Release 1 or later. I/O Card Slots Used: One. Maximums: Four on Models D35-D70, E35-E70 and F35-F70. Eight on Models D80, E80-E95 and F80-F97.

Refer to IBM publication SC41-0004 "IBM Application System/400 Communications: Local Area Network Guide", for an introduction to Frame Relay, AS/400 implementation, Configurations, addressing considerations, interfaces and Frame Relay examples.

LAN Adapters

(#2618) Fiber Distributed Data Interface Adapter

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

This feature provides one interface to connect an AS/400 System to an FDDI LAN which complies with ANSI X3T9.5 and ISO 9314 standards. Feature #2618 consists of a card, a wrap connector and Licensed Internal Code which supplies IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC), ANSI X3T9.5/ISO 9314 Media Access Control (MAC) functions, and ANSI X3T9.5 Station Management (SMT) functions (draft version 7.2 level which is compatible with version 6.2). OS/400 configuration parameters are used to select whether the adapter operates as a Single Attach Station (SAS), a Dual Attach Station (DAS) or a dual-homing station. An interface is provided which can be used to connect through and control an optical bypass switch. A maximum frame size of 4K bytes is supported. OS/400 Version 2 Release 3 or later is required, which provides support for SNA communications.

Refer to IBM publication GA27-3892, "IBM FDDI Network Introduction and Planning Guide", for an introduction to FDDI concepts, descriptions of IBM FDDI components and information for planning and installing IBM FDDI networks on optical fiber media.

I/O Card Slots Used: One. Maximums: Models D35, D45, E35, E45, F35 and F45 - One. Models D50-D80, E50-E95, F50-F97 - Two. Refer to 9406 LAN Feature Summary Chart.

Cables: The FDDI Adapter requires multi-mode (62.5/125 micron) FDDI optical fiber jumper cables to connect the adapter into the FDDI ring. These jumper cables are not provided with this feature. Jumper cables are the responsibility of the customer and may be ordered from your local authorized IBM cabling distributor. For more information about the jumper cables, planning, design and installation of optical fiber cabling systems, refer to IBM publication GA27-3943, "IBM Cabling System Optical Fiber Installation and Planning Guide."

(#2665) Shielded Twisted-Pair Distributed Data Interface Adapter

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)

This feature provides one interface to connect an AS/400 System to an FDDI LAN which is constructed of IBM Cabling System Type 1, 2, 6, or 9 shielded twisted-pair wiring. Feature #2665 consists of a card, a wrap connector and Licensed Internal Code which supplies IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC), ANSI X3T9.5/ISO 9314 Media Access Control (MAC) functions, and ANSI X3T9.5 Station Management (SMT) functions (draft version 7.2 level which is compatible with version 6.2). OS/400 configuration parameters are used to select whether the adapter operates as a Single Attach Station (SAS), a Dual Attach Station (DAS) or a dual- homing station. A maximum frame size of 4K bytes is supported. OS/400 Version 2 Release 3 or later is required, which provides support for SNA communications.

Refer to IBM publication GA27-3892, "IBM FDDI Network Introduction and Planning Guide", for an introduction to FDDI concepts, descriptions of IBM FDDI components and information for planning and installing IBM FDDI networks on shielded twisted pair copper media.

I/O Card Slots Used: One. Maximums: Models D35, D45, E35, E45, F35 and F45 - One. Models D50-D80, E50-E95, F50-F97 - Two. Refer to 9406 LAN Feature Summary Chart.

Cables: The SDDI Adapter requires IBM FDDI copper jumper cables to connect the adapter into the FDDI ring. These jumper cables are not provided with this feature. Jumper cables are the responsibility of the customer and may be ordered from your local authorized IBM cabling distributor. For more information about the jumper cables, planning, design and installation of FDDI networks, refer to IBM publication GA27-3892, "IBM FDDI Network Introduction and Planning Guide."

(#2619) 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter/HP

The 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter/HP feature provides a single attachment to either a 16Mbps or a 4Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network. The feature consists of an adapter card, internal code which supplies IEEE 802.5 Media Access Control (MAC) and IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) functions, and an external 2.5 meter (8 foot) cable. The standard IBM Cabling System patch cables can increase the length where necessary.

OS/400 configuration parameters are used to select either the 16 or 4Mbps rate. Early token release can be enabled or disabled when the 16Mbps rate is selected. These controls allow the customer to easily migrate from a 4 to a 16Mbps Token-Ring Network.

Feature #2619 is functionally equivalent to feature #2626. Feature #2619 is based on a faster microprocessor, providing up to three times the throughput of feature #2626. A maximum frame size of up to 16K bytes is supported. Support of OS/400 Version 2 Release 2 is required.

I/O Card Slots Used: One. Maximums: Four per system on all supported models except the models E80, E90, E95, F80, F90, F95 and F97, which have a maximum of six. Refer to the 9406 LAN Feature Summary Chart. Cables: One Token-Ring network attachment 2.5 meter (8-foot) cable.

(#2626) 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter/A

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)

The 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter/A feature provides a single attachment to either a 16Mbps or a 4Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network. The feature consists of an adapter card, internal code which supplies IEEE 802.5 Media Access Control (MAC) and IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) functions, and an external 2.5 meter (8 foot) cable. The standard IBM Cabling System patch cables can increase the length where necessary.

OS/400 configuration parameters are used to select either the 16 or 4Mbps rate. Early token release can be enabled or disabled when the 16Mbps rate is selected. These controls allow the customer to easily migrate from a 4 to a 16Mbps Token-Ring Network.

Feature #2626 is functionally equivalent to feature #2636. Feature #2626 is based on a faster microprocessor, providing up to two times the throughput of feature #2636. A maximum frame size of up to 16K bytes is supported.

I/O Card Slots Used: One. Maximums: Models D35-D80, E35-E70 and F35-F70 - Four. Models E80-E95 and F80-F97 - Six. Refer to the 9406 LAN Feature Summary Chart. Cables: One Token-Ring Network attachment 2.5 meter (8-foot) cable.

(#2636) 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of June 30, 1996)

The 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter feature provides a single attachment to a 16Mbps or a 4Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network. The feature consists of an adapter card, internal code which supplies IEEE 802.5 Media Access Control (MAC) and IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) functions, and an external 2.5 meter (8 foot) cable. The standard IBM Cabling System can increase the length where necessary.

OS/400 configuration parameters are used to select either the 16Mbps or 4Mbps rate. Early Token Release can be enabled or disabled when the 16Mbps rate is selected. These controls allow the customer to easily migrate from a 4 to a 16Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network.

Feature #2636 is based on the same microprocessor as feature #6240. The adapter (#2636) supports a maximum frame size of up to 8K bytes. This increased frame size, along with other changes to the licensed internal code, provide improved performance during large file transfer operations. Short interactive workstation exchanges will see little response time improvement over the 4Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Subsystem (#6240).

I/O Card Slots Used: One. Maximums: Models D35-D80, E35-E70, and F35-F60 - Four. Models E80-E95 and F70-F97 - Six. Refer to the 9406 LAN Feature Summary Chart. Cables: One Token-Ring Network attachment 2.5 meter (8-foot) cable.

(#2617) Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Adapter/HP

The Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Adapter/HP provides a single attachment to one Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect Local Area Network. Feature #2617 offers enhanced performance when compared to feature #2625. This High Performance adapter uses a faster microprocessor and additional memory to provide up to six times the throughput of feature #2625. Support of OS/400 Version 2 Release 2 or later is required.

A 15 pin "D" connector provides a standard Attachment Unit Interface (AUI) for connection through an external transceiver. Transceivers which attach to 10Base-T (unshielded twisted pair), 10Base-2 (Thin Ethernet), and standard Ethernet coaxial media can be obtained from an Ethernet supplier.

The feature consists of an adapter card and internal code which supplies Ethernet version 2 and IEEE 802.3 Media Access Control (MAC) plus IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) functions. This adapter offers the customer a connection to Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 LANs, which support communications with both IBM and non-IBM products. Concurrent sessions with both Ethernet Version 2 and IEEE 802.3 stations are possible. These two CSMA/CD protocols are able to coexist on the same LAN but they cannot communicate with each other. This concurrent session capability of feature #2617 allows the 9406 to support a customer's staged migration from Ethernet Version 2 to the newer IEEE/802.3 LAN.

I/O Card Slots Used: One. Maximums: Four per system on all supported models except the models E80, E90, E95, F80, F90, F95 and F97, which have a maximum of six. Refer to the 9406 LAN Feature Summary Chart. Cables: The customer must procure the Attachment Unit Interface (AUI) cable which connects between the adapter and the Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 transceiver. This cable and the transceiver are not available from IBM, but can be obtained from an Ethernet supplier.

(#2625) Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD LAN Adapter

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of January 24, 1996)

The Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD LAN Adapter feature, available on 9406 D, E and F models, provides a single attachment to one Ethernet Version 2 or one IEEE 802.3 Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect Local Area Network. The feature consists of an adapter card and internal code which supplies Ethernet version 2 and IEEE 802.3 Media Access Control (MAC) plus IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) functions. The customer must procure the Attachment Unit Interface (AUI) cable which connects between feature #2625 and the Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 transceiver. This feature offers the customer a direct connection to Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 LANs, which supports communications with both IBM and non-IBM products. Concurrent sessions with both Ethernet Version 2 and IEEE 802.3 stations are possible. These two CSMA/CD protocols are able to coexist on the same LAN but they can not communicate with each other. This concurrent session capability of feature #2625 allows the AS/400 system to support a customer's staged migration from Ethernet Version 2 to the newer IEEE/802.3 LAN. I/O Card Slots Used: One. Maximums: Models D35-D80, E35-E70 and F35-F70 - Four. Models E80-E95 and F80-F95 - Six. Model F97 - Eight. Refer to the 9406 LAN Feature Summary Chart.

(#2663) I/O Attachment Processor

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

This feature provides the communications hardware base for the AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter (#2668). The two features are integrated in a single hardware package to operate as a unit. Feature #2663 consists of a new I/O processor card that provides a connection to feature #2668. Operating System/400 Version 3 Release 1, or later, is required.

The I/O Attachment Processor is attached to AS/400 systems as a prerequisite for feature #2668. Refer to feature #2668 for usage guidelines and maximums.

I/O card slots required: One (shared with feature #2668).

Maximums: refer to 9404 System LAN Feature Summary table

(#2664) Integrated Fax Adapter

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of December 31, 1999)

This feature provides the AS/400 with two ports capable of transmission and receipt of facsimile data to or from a Group 3 capable fax machine, another AS/400 with an Integrated Fax Adapter, or PCs with appropriately programmed fax adapters. Feature #2664 consists of a card, a wrap cable (one per machine), two country-unique attachment couplers, telephone cables and Licensed Internal Code.

The Integrated Fax Adapter is supported by the Facsimile Support/400* licensed program offering that, until now, supported only the PS/2 LAN-based facsimile product. This program provides configuration parameters for the Integrated Fax Adapter, schedules fax transmissions between multiple adapters, and manages sending and receiving faxes to and from the adapter.

The Integrated Fax Adapter can simultaneously support two send, two receive, or one send and one receive operation. To the AS/400 system, the Integrated Fax Adapter appears as an IPDS* (Intelligent Printer Data Stream) printer for outbound faxes. Most output, including text, image, graphics and bar codes that can be printed on an AS/400 IPDS printer can be faxed via the Integrated Fax Adapter. Double Byte Character Sets (DBCS) are supported for in-bound faxes, but not for out-bound faxes.

The Integrated Fax Adapter is designed to be directly attached to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). Attachment to a Private Branch Exchange (PBX) may give unsatisfactory results.

Feature #2664 supports the facsimile protocols defined in CCITT Blue Book Volume VII, Fasicle VII.3 Recommendations T.4 and T.30.

Feature #2664 supports the following compression algorithms in fax mode:

·                     Group 3 MR

·                     Group 3 MH

Feature #2664 supports the following modem standards:

·                     V.21 ch2 (300bps)

·                     V.27 ter (2400, 4800bps)

·                     V.29 (7200, 9600bps)

Initial country support includes: USA, Canada, France, United Kingdom, Germany, Italy, Japan and Sweden. Country support is subject to approval by that country. Two country-unique couplers and country- specific Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) attachment cables (one for each port), are required. The couplers and cables are included with the Integrated Fax Adapter feature.

OS/400 Version 2 Release 3, or later, and Facsimile Support/400 Version 3 Release 0.5, or later, or OS/400 Version 2 Release 3 and Facsimile Support/400 Version 2 Release 3, with PRPQ P84237 (5799-XBX) are required to support this feature.

Documents transmitted from the AS/400 through the Integrated Fax Adapter are limited to a maximum of approximately 30 text pages per port, per phone call. If only a single port is configured for sending Fax documents, then the limit is raised to approximately 60 text pages. Resident cover pages are counted against this limit.

Card slots used: One Maximum: Refer to System Unit Summary.

(#2668) AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

The AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter provides wireless connectivity from AS/400 systems to workstations or other systems connected to a wireless LAN network. With a wireless LAN connection, end-users can have roaming, portable access to the information they need, wherever they are, within the area of local wireless radio coverage. In addition, the AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter may be the preferred solution in situations where wiring is expensive or impossible or where computing resource and device layouts change periodically. Support is provided for portable and stationary PCs, for specialized hand-held devices used for data collection, and for connections between AS/400 systems.

The AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter uses an advanced technology, direct sequence, spread-spectrum radio operating in the 2.4 to 2.4835GHz band. The operating band may be narrower in some countries to meet country regulations. Spread spectrum provides excellent resistance to interference from other radio frequency (RF) sources.

Availability of this feature in any particular country is dependent on current country radio frequency regulations and certification for use by the country.

The AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter has not been approved by the Federal Communications Commission. This device is not, and may not be offered for sale or lease, or sold or leased until the approval of the FCC has been obtained.

Operation in the United States does not require a license from the Federal Communications Commission.

The AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter comes with an antenna and a cable for connecting the antenna to the adapter. The area of coverage may be extended beyond the coverage provided by the antenna attached to the adapter by adding AS/400 Wireless LAN Access Points to the network via an unshielded twisted-pair wired backbone. In addition, access points may be connected without wires, acting as wireless repeaters. Each adapter or access point generates one cell of coverage area. Networks are designed to create overlapping cells to ensure consistent coverage of the area desired. The AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter allows transparent seamless movement from cell to cell while maintaining a continuous host session. A site survey by trained professionals is recommended to assist in network design.

The AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter operates with existing application software interfaces. Existing 5250 and LAN-oriented applications can use the AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter without change.

The AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter supports the AS/400 family of wireless LAN and data collection devices. This family of devices provides comprehensive connectivity solutions for attaching personal computers and data collection devices to the AS/400 in a mobile, wireless fashion. The AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter also operates with the DATASPAN** 2.4GHz family of products from the Telxon Corporation. In addition to the AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter, the following AS/400 wireless LAN networking devices are available from IBM:

·                     Micro Channel* and PC AT (ISA) wireless LAN adapters to enable PCs to participate in the AS/400 Wireless LAN network.

·                     Lightweight, compact RS-485 and Ethernet wireless LAN Access Points.

·                     A variety of wireless bar-code scanning data collection devices.

The raw bit rate for the AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter is 2Mbps, shared by all active devices in the network. The range covered by one cell in most office environments is from 100 to 300 feet in all directions, depending on the building structure, antenna type and antenna placement. Outdoors, with a clear line-of-sight between specialized antennas, a range of up to three miles may be achieved.

This feature consists of an I/O adapter card, an antenna and a coaxial cable to attach the antenna. The following cable and antenna choices are offered:

·                     One of the following:

o                                            #9814 - 20-Foot Antenna Cable (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

o                                            #9815 - 50-Foot Antenna Cable (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

·                     One of the following:

o                                            #9890 - Omni-Directional (360 degree) Antenna (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

o                                            #9891 - Hemispherical (180 degree) Antenna (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

o                                            #9892 - Directional (90 degree) Antenna (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of August 31, 1998)

Feature #2663, I/O Attachment Processor, is a prerequisite to this feature. Support in OS/400 Version 3 Release 1, or later is required. I/O card slots used: One (shared with Feature #2663). Maximum per system: Refer to 9406 LAN Feature Summary table for feature # 2663.

(#6149) 16/4Mbps Token-Ring IOA

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of May 31, 2001)

The 16/4Mbps Token-Ring IOA feature provides a single attachment to either a 16Mbps or a 4Mbps IBM Token-Ring network. The feature consists of an IOA card, internal code which supplies IEEE 802.5 Media Access Control (MAC) and IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) functions. The 16/4 Token-Ring IOA can operate in half-or full-duplex mode.

#6149 comes with a 2.44-meter (8-foot) token-ring cable. Alternatively, a customer supplied twisted-pair cable can attach to the RJ45 connection on the IOA. The standard IBM Cabling System patch cables can increase the length where necessary. This feature attaches only to the Integrated PC Server (#6616).

(#6181) Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 IOA

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 2001)

The Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 IOA provides a single attachment to one Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect LAN. The feature consists of an adapter card and internal code that supplies Ethernet version 2 and IEEE 802.3 Media Access Control (MAC) plus IEEE 802.2 LLC functions. The Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 IOA can operate half-or full-duplex mode.

#6181 has an RJ45 connector and a 15-pin D-Shell connector for attachment to customer-supplied RJ45 twisted-pair cable or AUI Ethernet cable. This feature attaches only to the Integrated PC Server (#6616).

File Server I/O Processor

The File Server I/O Processor (FSIOP), along with supporting AS/400 software, provides a high performance, client-centered file system. This file system provides access to client platforms such as OS/2, Windows and DOS attached to Token-Ring and Ethernet LANs. The file system can also be accessed by AS/400 host applications and provide LAN communications to AS/400 applications using TCP/IP and APPN.

The FSIOP can leverage OS/2 LAN server implementations to provide fast file serving performance on LANs. PC file serving performance on the AS/400 is increased up to eight times over previous AS/400 offerings.

The FSIOP consists of various initial order configurations that can be upgraded in the field using separate memory and second-port upgrade features. The following initial configuration features can be ordered:

·                     #6516 - 16MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #6517 - 32MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #6518 - 48MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #6519 - 64MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #6526 - 16MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #6527 - 32MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #6528 - 48MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #6529 - 64MB Two-Port FSIOP

The following optional base features are available on the 9402 Model 100 and the 9404 Models 135 and 140

·                     #8716 - Base 16MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #8717 - Base 32MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #8718 - Base 48MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #8719 - Base 64MB One-Port FSIOP

·                     #8726 - Base 16MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #8727 - Base 32MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #8728 - Base 48MB Two-Port FSIOP

·                     #8729 - Base 64MB Two-Port FSIOP

The following features are available for upgrading the capability of File Server I/O Processors:

·                     #6509 - Additional 16MB FSIOP Memory: From one to three features may be installed up to the FSIOP memory maximum of 64MB.

·                     #6520 - Upgrade One-Port FSIOP to Two-Port: One feature may be installed to increase the number of ports from one to two. Cannot be used with a two-port FSIOP.

Each LAN port can be configured to support one of the following interfaces:

        Protocol                  Connector             Media
    --------------------        -------------      ---------------
    4/16Mbps Token-Ring         9-pin D-Shell            STP
    4/16Mbps Token-Ring            RJ45                  UTP
    10Mbps Ethernet             15-pin D-Shell      10Base5 / AUI
    10Mbps Ethernet             15-pin D-Shell      10Base2 / External
                                                             Transceiver
    10Mbps Ethernet                RJ45                10BaseT

Cables: One or two of the following LAN cables are included with the FSIOP and should be specified when ordering. One cable is included with a One-Port FSIOP and upgrade feature #6520. Two cables are included with the Two-Port FSIOPs. (Note: If using the RJ45 connection, a specify cable is not required.)

·                     #9024 - Token-Ring Cable (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)

·                     #9025 - Ethernet Cable (For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)

The File Server I/O Processor features require the support of OS/400 Version 3 Release 1.0, or later. Each FSIOP feature also requires the licensed program, LAN Server/400 (5763-XZ1).

The maximum number of FSIOP features that may be installed on the AS/400 is four, subject to the maximum number of LANs allowed on the system. The maximum is the aggregate number of all types of LANs. The Two-Port FSIOP is counted as two LANs. Card slots required: Two

Maximums: Refer to 9406 LAN Feature Summary table

(#6616) Integrated PC Server

The Integrated PC Server is the next step in the evolution of the file serving IOP family. It contains a 166MHz Pentium processor, two IOP memory card slots, and two LAN IOA slots.

Each IOP memory slot can contain either a 32MB or a 128MB card, producing a range of IOP memory capacity from 32MB up to 256MB. At least one IOP memory feature card is required. The IOP memory feature cards are:

·                     #2861 32MB IOP Memory

·                     #2862 128MB IOP Memory

Each LAN IOA slot can contain either a Token-Ring IOA or an Ethernet IOA. At least one LAN IOA feature is required. The Integrated PC Server is capable of supporting two IOAs in any combination. The features for the LAN IOAs are:

·                     #6149 16/4Mbps Token-Ring IOA

·                     #6181 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 IOA

Prerequisites: At least one memory feature (either #2861 or #2862) and at least one LAN feature (either #6149 Token-Ring, or #6181 Ethernet). Requires OS/400 V3R2 with OS/400 no-charge feature #1978, V3R2 Integrated PC Server Support for AS/400.

Novell NetWare V4.1, Lotus Notes 4.1, and FlowMark V2.3 are supported on the new Integrated PC Servers (features #2850 and #6616).

Lotus Domino (Notes Server) 4.5 will be supported on the Integrated PC Servers beginning May 2, 1997. AS/400 support for Domino will include a simplified installation procedure in addition to the new function that Domino provides.

LAN Server for AS/400 is currently not supported on the new Integrated PC Servers (Features #2850 and #6616).

9406 LAN Feature Summary Chart

       ----------------------------------------------------------------
      |     9406 System LAN Feature Summary                            |
      |----------------------------------------------------------------|
      |            LAN Feature Number                                  |
 -----|----------------------------------------------------------------|
      |    |    |     |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |MAX|
|     |    |    |     |2663|    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |MAX|
|Model|2618|2665|FSIOP|2668|2619|2626|2636|6240|6242|2617|2625|6250|LAN|
|---  |----|----|-----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|---|
|F35  | F  | F  |  F  | F  | F  | F  | S  | S  | S  | F  | S  | S  | 4 |
|---  |    |    |     |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |   |
|F45  | F  | F  |  F  | F  | F  | F  | S  | S  | S  | F  | S  | S  | 4 |
|---  |    |    |     |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |   |
|F50  | F  | F  |  F  | F  | F  | F  | S  | S  | S  | F  | S  | S  | 4 |
|---  |    |    |     |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |   |
|F60  | F  | F  |  F  | F  | F  | F  | S  | S  | S  | F  | S  | S  | 4 |
|---  |    |    |     |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |   |
|F70  | F  | F  |  F  | F  | F  | F  | S  | S  | S  | F  | S  | S  | 6 |
|---  |    |    |     |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |   |
|F80  | F  | F  |  F  | F  | F  | F  | S  | S  | S  | F  | S  | S  | 6 |
|---  |    |    |     |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |   |
|F90  | F  | F  |  F  | F  | F  | F  | S  | S  | S  | F  | S  | S  | 6 |
|---  |    |    |     |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |   |
|F95  | F  | F  |  F  | F  | F  | F  | S  | S  | S  | F  | S  | S  | 6 |
|---  |    |    |     |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |   |
|F97  | F  | F  |  F  | F  | F  | F  | S  | S  | S  | F  | S  | S  | 8 |
------------------------------------------------------------------------

Notes:

·                     The maximum number of LANs for each system model reflects the total of all LAN features which can be installed on that model.

·                     Only one 100Mbps LAN (FDDI #2618 or SDDI #2665) may be included in this maximum for models D35, D45, E35, E45, F35 and F45. Models D50-D80, E50-E95, F50-F97 may have up to two 100Mbps LANs included in this maximum.

·                     The FSIOP is offered in one-port and two-port configurations. The two-port features count as two LANs when figuring the maximum LANs.

·                     Feature #6520 upgrades a One-Port FSIOP to a Two-Port FSIOP. #6520 counts as one LAN against the total LANs/System.

·                     F = Available as an orderable feature on these system models.

·                     S = Supported; not an orderable feature on this system model but may be brought along if upgrading from a previous model.

·                     All of the Token-Ring network features for the AS/400 system use the same 2.5 meter cable for connection to the Token-Ring. The standard IBM Cabling System patch cables can increase the length where necessary.

·                     The high performance Token-Ring Adapter (#2619) should be ordered where 9406 system LAN bandwidth demand is expected to exceed 1-4Mbps. This range assumes a random transaction mix consisting of both short interactive exchanges and large file transfers. The low end of the range applies when short exchanges represent most of the LAN traffic. Below these thresholds feature #2626 should offer acceptable performance at a lower price.

·                     The high performance Ethernet adapter (#2617) should be ordered when 9406 system LAN bandwidth demand is expected to exceed .3-1Mbps. This range assumes a random transaction mix consisting of both short interactive exchanges and large file transfers. The low end of the range applies when short exchanges represent most of the LAN traffic. Below these thresholds feature #2625 should offer acceptable performance at a lower price.

Communication Guidelines

9406 communications controllers and line adapters support a variety of protocols and line types:

·                     Switched and nonswitched point-to-point and multipoint lines are supported. X.25 lines are full duplex. ASYNC lines can be full or half duplex.

·                     Serial Autodial modem support is provided by the EIA 232/V.24 interface. The V.25 bis command set is supported for synchronous(SDLC), Binary Synchronous (BSC), X.25 and Asynchronous(ASYNC) lines. Modems must support the bit synchronous (HDLC) format for dialing to establish connection for BSC data transfer using the AS/400 V.25 bis Autodial Support for BSC lines.

·                     The AS/400 does not offer a Digital Data Service Adapter (DDSA). Access to the AT&T Data-Phone Digital Service(1) is via a 5821 or 5822 Data Service Unit (DSU) and Channel Service Unit (CSU). The 9406 Communications Controllers support the 5821 or 5822 DSU/CSU (or equivalent OEM DSU/CSU).

·                     X.21 networks that are compatible with IBM's implementation of X.21 as described in "IBM Implementation of X.21 General Information manual", GA27-3287 and complying with the CCITT Recommendation X.21, 1980 and 1984, are supported. The X.21 Short Hold Mode (SHM) and Multiple Port Sharing (MPS) functions of X.21 Circuit Switched are supported on the 9406. X.21 guidelines are:

o                                            X.21 SHM/MPS concurrent operation is supported for any combination of up to six lines per port group and up to six port groups with BSC, ASYNC, SDLC, and X.25 lines by the Six-line Communications Controller.

o                                            The Multi-Function I/O Processor supports one one-line X.21 SHM line with concurrent operation of either BSC, ASYNC, SDLC, or X.25 on the other line.

·                     The 9406 provides for packet-switched networks complying with the 1980, 1984 and 1988 CCITT recommendation X.25. The 9406 interface to these networks will be in conformance with the functional description contained in the "IBM General Information Manual X.25 Interface for attaching IBM SNA Nodes to Packet-Switched Data Networks" (GA27-3345, 1980 and GA27-3761, 1984 and 1988). Attachment to an X.25 network is via a nonswitched line through either an X.21 bis(V.24 or V.35) interface.

Attachment to an X.25 network via an X.25 switched line is also supported.

See 2700 Charts P and Q in Sales Pages for a list of supported networks. X.25 guidelines are:

o                                            X.25 circuits can be permanent or switched virtual circuits.

o                                            9406 supports up to 96 switched and/or permanent virtual circuits per Six-Line Communications Controller with up to 32 virtual circuits per line.

o                                            X.25 support is defined in 'The X.25 1984 Interface for attaching SNA Nodes to Packet Switched Data Networks" Architecture Reference SC30-3409.

·                     ISDN guidelines:

The ISDN Basic Rate Interface Adapter (#2605) will provide the capability to attach to voice/data transmission services having interfaces complying with the IBM ISDN architecture which interprets Recommendation ISDN (1988) of the International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT). This interface support will be in conformance with the functional description contained in "Integrated Services Digital Networks Data Link Control - Architecture Reference" (SC31-6826), and "Integrated Services Digital Networks Circuit-Switching Signalling Control - Architecture Reference" (SC31-6827). This ISDN feature supports attachment to the following switches:

o                                            AT&T 5ESS

o                                            Northern Telecom DMS100 (single B - Channel per Basic Rate Adapter)

o                                            TELEOS IAP 6000 (Customer Premise Equipment)

Version 2 Release 3 of OS/400 adds support for what is commonly called National ISDN. The Basic Rate Interface Adapter (#2605) now also provides the capability to attach to voice/data transmission services which comply with the guidelines specified in the following Bellcore documents:

4.      Generic Guidelines for ISDN Terminal Equipment on Basic Access Interfaces; Special Report SR-NWT-001953

5.      Generic Guidelines for ISDN Terminal Equipment on National ISDN-2 Basic Rate Interfaces; Special Report SR-NWT-002361

OS/400 configuration parameters are used to select the Basic Rate Interface Adapter operation which is compatible with the ISDN transmission services being used. Announcement of attachment capability for other ISDN switches, or given release levels of these switches, will depend on network availability and IBM's characterization of the network interface. Selection of additional ISDN networks for attachment will be based upon IBM's technical and business judgement in addressing the requirements of its customers. If network suppliers require certification of this feature, it is the responsibility of the customer or the network supplier to obtain this certification.

This adapter allows communications via ISDN/IDLC with the following:

o                                            Other similarly equipped AS/400 systems

o                                            PS/2 3270 Emulation

o                                            3174 (downstream)

Attachment of X.25 Packet Switched Networks is also supported using an ISDN B channel as the access facility. The AS/400 will support two X.25 network access types:

§                                                                     Circuit Mode - This ISDN network is used to access an X.25 PSN

§                                                                     Packet Mode - The ISDN network provides X.25 (Based on offerings of the network provider)

Note: When using the ISDN Basic Rate Interface Adapter (#2605), communications with other systems equipped with the IBM ISDN 7820 is not supported if these systems do not support IDLC or X.25 protocols (either natively or through a protocol converter box).

·                     640Kbps V.35 SDLC Data Lines using T1/E1/J1 DCE:

Using appropriate T1/E1/J1 DCE (multiplexors or DSU/CSU), the Six-line communication controller (#2623) with attached V.35 One-line adapters (#6153-6173) supports SDLC data lines at speeds up to:

o                                            640Kbps for one V.35 SDLC line per controller

o                                            512Kbps each for two V.35 SDLC lines per controller

o                                            384Kbps each for three V.35 SDLC lines per controller

Four Six-line Controllers configured for T1/E1/J1 DCE attachment are supported for Models D35 to D70 and E35 to E70. Eight are supported for the 9406 Models D80, E80 and E90.

Use of the Six-line controller with other line types (ASYNC, BSC, ISDN, X.25 and X.21 SHM) is not supported when one or more V.35 SDLC Data lines is configured for attachment to T1/E1/J1 DCE on the same controller.

·                     Maximum Line Speeds

·                                Protocol   232/V.24   V.35   X.21   I.430    449/V.36
·                                 ASYNC         19.2     *       *      *       *
·                                 BSC           19.2    64.0     *      *       *
·                                 SDLC          19.2   2048    2048     *      2048
·                                 X.25          19.2   640.0   640.0    *      640.0
·                                 IDLC           *       *       *    64.0      *
·                                 Frame Relay    *     2048    2048     *      2048
·                              *  Not applicable

Note - Not all maximum speeds are supported on all features. Refer to specific feature descriptions for any limitations.

Feature Card Slot Restrictions

This section is intended for use when an on-line configurator is not being used to assist in the configuration and ordering of the system. Card slot totals help determine the ability to add features to a system. There are feature combination constraints that are listed in the feature descriptions. Individual feature restrictions must be resolved before card slot totals are considered. Card slots per feature are:

Feature                                          Card
 Code    Description                             Slots
#2617  Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Adapter/HP              1
#2618  Fiber Distributed Data Interface Adapter    1
#2619  16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter/HP      1
#2620  Encryption Attachment                       1
#2621  Removable Media Device Attachment           1
#2622  3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment     1
#2644  3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment/HP  1
#2623  Six-Line Communications Controller          1
#2625  Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD LAN Adapter     1
#2626  IBM 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter/A   1
#2628  Limited Encryption Attachment (WT only)     1
#2636  IBM 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter     1
#2664  Integrated Fax Adapter                      1
#2665  Shielded Distributed Data Interface Adapter 1
#2666  High Speed Communication Adapter            1
#2668  AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter                 1
#5031  I/O Card Unit                               1
#5040  Bus Extension Unit                          1
#6050  Enhanced Twinaxial Workstation Controller   1
#6112  Magnetic Storage Device Controller          1
#6140  Twinaxial Workstations Controller           1
#6141  ASCII Workstation Controller                1
#6500  Direct Access Storage Device Controller     1
#6501  Direct Access Storage Device Controller     1
#6516  16MB One-Port FSIOP                         2
#6517  32MB One-Port FSIOP                         2
#6518  48MB One-Port FSIOP                         2
#6519  64MB One-Port FSIOP                         2
#6526  16MB Two-Port FSIOP                         2
#6527  32MB Two-Port FSIOP                         2
#6528  48MB Two-Port FSIOP                         2
#6529  64MB Two-Port FSIOP                         2
#8505  I/O Card Unit Conversion Feature            1

The charts below summarize the available card slot limits by model based on the number of System Unit Expansions (#5042) and Bus Extension Units (#5040) installed.

The upper portion of the chart is used to determine the total number of I/O controller card slots in the system unit plus any installed System Unit Expansions (#5042). The lower portion of the chart is used to determine the total available I/O controllers by adding the total number from the upper portion of the chart, to the number of additional slots contained in any attached Bus Extension Units (#5040).

Number
of 5042s  D35/E35   D45/E45   D50/E50   D60/E60   D70/E70   D80/E80-E95
--------  -------   -------   -------   -------   -------   -----------
 None       11        11         *         *         *           *
  1          *         *        18        18        18          18
  2          *         *         *        30        30          30
  3          *         *         *         *         *          42
* Not applicable
Number
of 5040s  D35/E35   D45/E45   D50/E50   D60/E60   D70/E70   D80/E80-E95
--------  -------   -------   -------   -------   -------   -----------
 None       11        11        18       18,30     18,30      18,30,42
  1         22        22        29       29,41     29,41      29,41,53
  2         33        33        40       40,52     40,52      40,52,64
  3         44        44        51       51,63     51,63      51,63,75
  4         55        55        62       62,74     62,74      62,74,86
  5          *         *        73       73,85     73,85      73,85,97
  6          *         *        84       84,96     84,96      84,96,108
  7          *         *         *        *,107     *,107     *,107,119
  8          *         *         *        *,118     *,118     *,118,130
  9          *         *         *        *,129     *,129     *,129,141
 10          *         *         *        *,140     *,140     *,140,152
 11          *         *         *        *,*       *,*       *,*,163
 12          *         *         *        *,*       *,*       *,*,174
 13          *         *         *        *,*       *,*       *,*,185
 14          *         *         *        *,*       *,*       *,*,196
* Not applicable
Number
of 5042s    F35        F45      F50-F60     F70 - F97
--------  -------    -------    -------    -----------
 None       11         11          *            *
  1          *          *         18           17
  2          *          *         30           29
  3          *          *          *           41
* Not applicable
Number
of 5040s    F35        F45      F50-F60     F70 - F97
--------  -------    -------    -------    -----------
 None       11         11        18,30       17,29,41
  1         22         22        29,41       28,40,52
  2         33         33        40,52       39,51,63
  3         44         44        51,63       50,62,74
  4         55         55        62,74       61,73,85
  5          *          *        73,85       72,84,96
  6          *          *        84,96       83,95,107
  7          *          *         *,107      *,106,118
  8          *          *         *,118      *,117,129
  9          *          *         *,129      *,128,140
 10          *          *         *,140      *,139,151
 11          *          *         *,*        *,*,162
 12          *          *         *,*        *,*,173
 13          *          *         *,*        *,*,184
 14          *          *         *,*        *,*,195
* Not applicable

The chart below summarizes the available buses by model based on the number of System Unit Expansions (#5042) installed:

Number    D35/E35   D45/E45   D50/E50   D60/E60   D70/E70   D80/E80-E95
of 5042s    F35       F45               F50-F60               F70-F97
--------  -------   -------   -------   -------   -------   -----------
 None        2         2         *         *         *           *
  1          *         *         3         3         3           3
  2          *         *         *         5         5           5
  3          *         *         *         *         *           7
* Not applicable

Rack Enclosures and Configurations

Rack Enclosure

The 9406 System Unit, System Unit Expansion, and Bus Extension Unit include a rack enclosure. The attached I/O Card Unit, disk units, diskette units, and tape units (except 3422, 3430, 3480, 3490 (other than 3490E-CXX), and 7208 tape drives), are mounted into the 9406 System Unit, System Unit Expansion, Bus Extension Unit or 9309 Model 2 Rack Enclosures (1.6 meter).

These rack enclosures provide:

·                     A cabinet to house the individual rack mountable units that make up a system

·                     Power control of all units within the rack (under control of the system unit) and power control for all racks connected to the power control network.

·                     Consolidation of individual unit AC power cords to one rack power cord

·                     Emergency Power Off (EPO) switch for each rack

·                     Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) interface

·                     Interface for external power-on signal

Rack Configurations for 9406

To simplify the ordering, installing and upgrading processes, the 9406 utilizes the concept of predetermined device locations within the rack enclosures. This concept provides a wide range of product flexibility with defined product growth and minimized device relocation on upgrades. This results in the systems being pre-assembled from combinations of ten defined rack configurations. When ordering 9309 racks for an 9406, the specify code corresponding to the desired configuration must be included with the 9309 order.

The placement or cabling sequence of racks in a multiple rack system does not have to be considered during the order process. This placement will have to be considered by the customer during their site preparation activity. The information needed for this activity is covered in chapter two and appendix G of the 9406 Physical Planning Guide (GA41-9571).

The following diagrams illustrate the rack configurations, showing where any ordered devices will be installed in the racks. At initial system build, blank filler panels will be installed over empty device locations.

9406 D, E, and F Model System Unit Racks

These racks can have DASD, tape and diskette units mounted within, and can provide a single rack system.

+-------------------+--+-------+
|                   |  |       |
|     9331/9332     |  | 5030/ |
+--------+--+-------+  | 5031  |
|        |  |-------|  | 3490E |
| 9336/7 |  +-------+or| -E11  |
| 9347/8 |or| 9331/ |  | X2    |
| 5032   |  | 9332  |  |  **   |
+--------+--+---+---+--+-------+
+-----------+   |              |
|           |   |  9331/9332   |
|  9336/37  |or +--------------+
|  9347/48  |   |              |
|  5032     |   |  9331/9332   |
+-----------+---+--------------+
|                              |
|                              |
|-----------+                  |
| 6366/68/69|                  |
|--------- - - - - - - - - - - |
|                              |
|                              |
|                              |
|                              |
|                              |
|       D, E and F Model       |
|         System Units         |
|                              |
|                              |
|                              |
|                              |
|                              |
+------------------------------+
** 5030/5031 not valid on initial order of the system

General Purpose I/O Rack 9309

(#9171)

This rack is the recommended secondary rack type used for additional 9331, 9336, 9337, 9347, 9348, 5032 and 3490E-Cxx devices and I/O Card Units (#5030 and #5031).

+--------+--+---------------+--------+
|        |  |               |  |     |
|  9336/ |  |   5030/5031   |  |     |
|  9337  |  |               |  |     |
|        |  | 3490E-E11(2X) |  |     |
+--------+or|               |  |     |
|        |  |      **       |  |     |
| 9336/7 |  |               |  |3490E|
| 9347/8 |  +---------+-----+or|-CXX |
| 5032   |  |---------|     |  |     |
+--------+--+------+  |     |  |     |
+--------+  | 9331 |  |     |  |     |
|        |  |  **  |  |3490E|  |     |
| 9336/7 |or+------+or|-E11 |  |     |
| 9347/8 |  | 9331 |  | (2X)|  |-----|
| 5032   |  |  **  |  |     |  |-----|
+--------+--+------+--+-----+--+-----+    +--------+
+-------------+    |                 |    |        |
|             |    |     9331 *      |    |        |
| 9336/9337/  | or +-----------------+    |        |
| 9347*/9348*/|    |                 |    |        |
| 5032        |    |         9331 *      |    |        |
+------------------+-----------------+    | 3490E  |
|             |    +-----------------+ or | -CXX   |
| 9336/9337   |    +-----------------+    |        |
|             |    |                 |    |        |
|             |    |                 |    |        |
+-------------+ or |    5030/5031    |    |        |
|             |    |                 |    |        |
| 9336/9337   |    |       **        |    |        |
|             |    |                 |    +--------+
|             |    |                 |    +--------+
+-------------+----+-----------------+    +--------+
* Not allowed if a 3490E-CXX is installed in this rack.
** 5030/5031 not valid on initial order of the system.
(#9177) 9332 Disk Unit Rack 9309

This rack configuration is used to mount 9332 DASD and 9336 Disk Unit / 9337 Disk Array Subsystem devices and I/O card unit features (#5030 and #5031) and is recommended for new orders only when the system is configured with 9332 DASD.

+----------+--+-------------+    +--------+
+----------+  |             |    |        |
|          |  |  9331/9332  |    |        |
|  9336/   |or+ ----------- +    |        |
|  9337    |  |             |    |        |
|          |  |  9331/9332  |    | 3490E  |
+----------+  + ----------- + or | -CXX   |
+----------+  |             |    |        |
|9336/9337 |  | 9331**/9332 |    |        |
|9347/9348 |or+ ----------- +    |        |
|  5032    |  |             |    |        |
|          |  | 9331**/9332 |    |        |
+----------+--+ ----------- +    +--------+
|----------|  |             |    +--------+
|----------|  |    5030/    |
+----------+  |    5031     |
|9336/9337 |or|  3490E-E11  |
|  9347*/  |  |    (2X)     |
|  9348*   |  |     **      |
|  5032    |  |             |
+----------+--+ ----------- +
+----------+  |             |
|          |  |    9332     |
|  9336/   |or+ ----------- +
|  9337    |  |             |
|          |  |    9332     |
+----------+  + ----------- +
+----------+  |             |
|          |  |    9332     |
|  9336/   |or+ ----------- +
|  9337    |  |             |
|   **     |  |    9332     |
+----------+--+ ----------- +
* Not allowed if a 3490E-CXX is installed in this rack.
** 5030/5031 not valid on initial order of the system/rack.

The following existing rack configurations are supported for model upgrades from B models to D and E models:

(#9277) 9332 Disk Unit Rack 9309

This rack configuration is used to mount 9332 DASD, 9336 Disk Unit, and 9337 Disk Array Subsystem devices, 9331 Diskette Units, 9347 and 9348 Tape Units, and I/O card unit features (#5030 and #5031). This rack configuration is not available for new orders and is used when a 9406 B model system is upgraded to a D/E/F model system. When a 9406 B model system is upgraded to a D/E/F model system, the B model system unit rack (9309 #9125, #9126, or #9140) and any 9332 Disk Unit Rack (9309 #9127) are converted to this rack configuration.

+----------+--+-------------+    +--------+
+----------+  |             |    |        |
|          |  |  9331/9332  |    |        |
|  9336/   |or+-------------+    |        |
|  9337    |  |             |    |        |
|          |  |  9331/9332  |    | 3490E  |
+----------+  +-------------+ or | -CXX   |
+----------+  |             |    |        |
|          |  | 9331/9332   |    |        |
|  9336/7  |or+-------------+    |        |
|  9347/8  |  |             |    |        |
|          |  | 9331/9332   |    |        |
+----------+--+-------------+    +--------+
|----------|  |             |    +--------+
|----------|  |             |
+----------+  |    5030/    |
|          |  |    5031     |
|  9336/7  |or|  3490E-E11  |
|9347*/8*  |  |    (2X)     |
|          |  |             |
+----------+--+-------------+
+----------+  |             |
|          |  |    9332     |
|  9336/   |or+-------------+
|  9337    |  |             |
|          |  |    9332     |
+----------+  +-------------+
+----------+  |             |
|          |  |    9332     |
|  9336/   |or+-------------+
|  9337    |  |             |
|          |  |    9332     |
+----------+--+-------------+
* Not allowed if a 3490E-CXX is installed in this rack.
(#9128) 9335 Disk Unit Rack 9309

This rack configuration is used to mount 9335 DASD, 9336 Disk Unit or 9337 Disk Array Subsystem devices. This rack can be used with any system unit rack and is recommended for new orders only when 9335 DASD is included with the system.

+---------------------------+
|                           |
|        9335-A01           |
+---------------------------+
|                           |
|        9335-A01           |
+---------------------------+
+----------+  |             |
|          |  |             |
|  9336/   |or|  9335-B01   |
|  9337    |  |             |
|          |  |             |
+----------+--+-------------+
+----------+  |             |
|          |  |             |
|  9336/   |or|  9335-B01   |
|  9337    |  |             |
|          |  |             |
+----------+--+-------------+
+----------+  |             |
|          |  |             |
|  9336/   |or|  9335-B01   |
|  9337    |  |             |
|          |  |             |
+----------+--+-------------+
+----------+  |             |
|          |  |             |
|  9336/   |or|  9335-B01   |
|  9337    |  |             |
|   **     |  |             |
+----------+--+-------------+
|---------------------------|
+---------------------------+
** Not valid on initial order of the system/rack
(#9129) I/O Expansion Rack 9309

This rack configuration is for field upgrades only and is no longer available for new orders. This rack configuration can be used to mount additional 9331, 9336, 9337, 9347, or 9348 devices or an I/O Card Unit (#5030).

+-----------+--+-------------+
+-----------+  |             |
|           |  |   9331      |
|   9336/   |or+-------------+
|   9337    |  |             |
|           |  |   9331      |
+-----------+--+-------------+
+----------------------------+
|                            |
|                            |
|    9336/9337/9347/9348     |
|                            |
+----------------------------+
+--------------------------- +
|                            |
|                            |
|    9336/9337/9347/9348     |
|                            |
+----------------------------+
+----------------------------+
|                            |
|                            |
|    9336/9337/9347/9348     |
|                            |
+-----------+--+-------------|
|-----------|  |             |
|-----------|  |             |
|-----------|  |             |
|           |or|    5030/    |
|   9336/   |  |    5031     |
|   9337    |  |             |
|           |  |             |
+-----------+--+-------------+
(#9130) I/O Card Unit Expansion Rack 9309

(No longer available on new orders)

This rack configuration, primarily intended for use on Models B50, B60, and B70 based systems, is used to mount additional I/O Card units (#5030), 9336 Disk Unit or 9337 Disk Array Subsystem devices.

+----------+--+-------------+
|----------|  |             |
|----------|  |             |
+----------+  |    5030/    |
|          |or|    5031     |
|  9336/   |  |  3490E-E11  |
|  9337    |  |    X2       |
|          |  |             |
+----------+--+-------------+
|----------|  |             |
|----------|  |             |
+----------+  |    5030/    |
|          |or|    5031     |
|  9336/   |  |  3490E-E11  |
|  9337    |  |    X2       |
|          |  |             |
+----------+--+-------------+
|----------|  |             |
|----------|  |             |
+----------+  |             |
|          |or|    5030/    |
|  9336/   |  |    5031     |
|  9337    |  |             |
|          |  |                                      |
+----------+--+-------------+
|----------|  |             |
|----------|  |             |
+----------+  |             |
|          |or|    5030/    |
|  9336/   |  |    5031     |
|  9337    |  |             |
|          |  |             |
+----------+--+-------------+
(#9141) General Purpose Expansion Rack 9309

Used for additional 9331, 9336, 9337, 9347, 9348 and 3490E devices and I/O Card units (#5030 and #5031). This rack configuration is no longer available for new orders. This rack configuration has been replaced by the General Purpose I/O Rack (9309 #9171).

+----------+--+---------------+--+-------+
|          |  |               |  |       |
|  9336/   |  |   5030/5031   |  |       |
|  9337    |  |               |  |       |
|          |  | 3490E-E11(2X) |  |       |
+----------+or|               |  |       |
|          |  |      **       |  | 3490E |
|  9336/7  |  |               |  | -CXX  |
|  9347/8  |  +---------+-----+or|       |
|          |  |---------|     |  |       |
+----------+--+------+  |     |  |       |
+----------+  | 9331 |  |3490E|  |       |
|          |  |  **  |  |-E11 |  |       |
|  9336/7  |or+------+or|(2X) |  |       |
|  9347/8  |  | 9331 |  |     |  |-------+
|          |  |  **  |  |     |  |-------|
+----------+--+------+--+-----+--+-------+
+---------------+    |                   |
|               |    |       9331 *      |
|   9336/9337/  | or +-------------------+
|  9347*/9348*  |    |                   |
|               |    |       9331 *      |
+---------------+----+-------------------+
|               |    +-------------------+
|               |    +-------------------+
|   9336/9337   |    |                   |
|               |    |                   |
+---------------+ or |        5030/      |
|               |    |        5031       |
|               |    |                   |
|   9336/9337   |    |                   |
|               |    |                   |
+---------------+----+-------------------+
* Not allowed if a 3490E-CXX is installed in this rack.
** 5030/5031 not valid on initial order of the system/rack

9406 Priced Feature Codes Supported FXX Models

Feat  Price File Name             |                          |Required
Code  (26 Character Limit)        |      FXX                 | OS/400
                                  |35 45 50 60 70 80 90 95 97|Release
----  ----------------------------|-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -----|--------
2605  ISDN Basic Rate Adapter     |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
2617  Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R2.0
2618  FDDI (Fiber Dist Data  Adptr|BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R3
2619  16/4 Mbps Token-Ring Adapt  |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R2.0
2620  Encryption Attachment       |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R3
2621  Removable Media Device Attch|BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
2622  3490 Magnetic Tape Attach   |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR BR|V2R1
2623  Six Line Comm Controller    |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
2625  Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V1R3
2626  16/4 Mbps Token-Ring Adapt  |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
2628  Limited Encryption (WT only)|BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R3
2636  16/4 Mbps Token-Ring Adapt  |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR BR|V1R3
2644  3490 Magnetic Tape Attach/HP|BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R2
2654  EIA 232/V.24 Two-Line 20E   |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
2655  EIA 232/V.24 Two-Line 20    |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
2656  X.21 Two-Line 20            |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
2657  EIA 232/V.24 Two-Line 50E   |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
2658  EIA 232/V.24 Two-Line 50    |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
2659  X.21 Two-line 50            |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
2663  I/O Attachment Processor    |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
2664  Integrated Facsimile IOP    |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R0.5
2665   SDDI(Shield Dist data adpt)|BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R3
2666  High Speed Comm Adapter     |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R3
2668  Wireless LAN   IOP          |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
2801  Add 2.0GB internal Disk     |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R2+
2802  Add 2.06GB internal Disk    |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R3
2861  32MB IOP Memory             |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R2
2862  128MB IOP Memory            |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R2
3100  16 MB Main Storage          |BR                        |V2R1
3101  32 MB Main Storage          |BR                        |V2R1
3102  16 MB Main Storage          |      BR                  |V2R1
3103  32 MB Main Storage          |      BR                  |V2R1
3104  64 MB Main Storage          |      BR                  |V2R1
3119  8 MB Main Storage           |BR                        |V2R1
3130  32 MB Main Storage          |         BR               |V2R2
3131  64 MB Main Storage          |         BR               |V2R2
3132  128 MB Main Storage         |         BR               |V2R2
3133  64 MB Main Storage          |            BR BR BR BR BR|V2R2
3134  128 MB Main Storage         |            BR BR BR BR BR|V2R2
3135  256 MB Main Storage         |            BR BR BR BR BR|V2R3
3140  8 MB Main Storage           |   BR                     |V2R2
3141  16 MB Main Storage          |   BR                     |V2R2
3142  64 MB Main Storage          |   BR                     |V2R2
5003  AS/400 CDSC Roch MFG        |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |
5006  Backup Tape-Preload SW      |P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P  P |V2R2
5030  I/O Card Unit               |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R1
5031  I/O Card Unit               |MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR|V2R1
5032  Removable Media Cluster Box |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R2
5040  Bus Extension Unit, Rack    |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
5042  System Unit Expansion, Rack |      B  B  BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
6040  Twinaxial Workstn Controller|SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R1
6041  ASCII Workstation Controller|SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R2
6042  ASCII 12 PORT Workstn attach|SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R2
6050  Twinaxial Workstn Controller|BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R2
6054  LocalTalk Adapter           |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R3
6112  Mag Storage Dev Controller  |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
Order Support Codes
-------------------
S - Supported (Load in price file and withdraw same day)
P - Plant install only
M - MES install only
B - Both Plant and MES install
* - Cable
R - Removal Price Released
Priced Feature Codes Supported by FXX Models, continued.
Feat  Price File Name             |                          |Required
Code  (26 Character Limit)        |      FXX                 | OS/400
                                  |35 45 50 60 70 80 90 95 97|Release
----  ----------------------------|-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -----|--------
6140  Twinaxial Workstn Controller|SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V2R1
6141  ASCII Workstation Controller|BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
6142  ASCII 12 PORT Workstn attach|BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
6149  16/4Mbps Token-Ring IOA     |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R2
6151  X.21 One-Line 20            |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V1R3
6153  V.35 One-Line 20            |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V1R3
6154  EIA 232/V.34 One-Line 20E   |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
6155  EIA 232/V.34 One-Line 20    |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
6171  X.21 One-Line 50            |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
6173  V.35 One-Line 50            |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
6174  EIA 232/V.34 One-Line 50E   |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
6175  EIA 232/V.34 One-Line 50    |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
6181  Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 IOA     |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R2
6229  EIA 232/V.24 Cable          |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R1
6230  2-Line Comm Subsystem       |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R1
6231  4-Line Comm Subsystem       |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R1
6232  8-Line Comm Subsystem       |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R1
6233  2-Line X.21 Subsystem       |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R1
6234  4-Line X.21 Subsystem       |SR SR   SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R1
6235  8-Line X.21 Subsystem       |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R1
6236  2-Line V.35 Subsystem       |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R1
6237  4-Line 232/V.24 & X.21      |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R1
6238  8-Line 232/V.24 & X.21      |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R1
6240  IBM Token-Ring Subsystem    |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R1
6242  16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R3
6250  ETHERNET/IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R3
6366  120MB 1/4-in Cart Tape      |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|V1R1
6367  525MB 1/4-in Cart Tape      |SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR|RPQ
6368  1.2 GB 1/4-in Cart Tape     |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R2
6369  2.5 GB 1/4-in Cart Tape     |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R0.5
6500  DASD Controller Polarstone  |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R2
6501  DASD Cntrlr Polarstone 3 4  |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R2++
6509  16MB SIMMS  for FSIOP       |MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR|V3R1
6516  1 Port LAN  16MB            |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
6517  1 Port LAN  32MB            |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
6518  1 Port LAN  48MB            |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
6519  1 Port LAN  64MB            |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
6520  2 Port LAN  for FSIOP upgrad|MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR|V3R1
6526  2 Port LAN  16MB            |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
6527  2 Port LAN  32MB            |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
6528  2 Port LAN  48MB            |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
6529  2 Port LAN  64MB            |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R1
6616  Integrated PC Server        |BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V3R2
8135  256 MB Main Storage         |                        MR|V2R3
8505  I/O Card Unit Conversion    |MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR MR|V2R1
9212  Power Control Cbl 100M      |      BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
9215  Power Control Cbl 60M       |      BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
9854  Sys Unit Exp Attach Cbl 60M |      BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
9855  Sys Unit Exp Attach Cbl 100M|      BR BR BR BR BR BR BR|V2R1
Order Support Codes
-------------------
S - Supported (Load in price file and withdraw same day)
P - Plant install only
M - MES install only
B - Both Plant and MES install
R - Removal Price Released
* - Cable

Feature Exchanges

The following feature exchanges are available on the 9406. In the U.S., one-for-one feature exchanges are generally ordered as MES Feature Conversions. Many-for-one (i.e., two-for-one, three-for-one, etc.), feature exchanges are ordered as MES Feature Group Exchanges. In countries other than the U. S., feature exchanges are ordered by feature codes.

                                              (Non-U.S)
                                               Feature
Memory Exchange                       Model     Code
 Exchange one 3054 for one 3119         A       3201
 Exchange one 3054 for one 3100         A       3202
 Exchange one 3054 for one 3101         A       3203
 Exchange one 3054 for one 3102         B       3204
 Exchange one 3054 for one 3103         B       3205
 Exchange one 3054 for one 3104         B       3206
 Exchange two 3054 for one 3119         A       3207
 Exchange two 3054 for one 3100         A       3208
 Exchange two 3054 for one 3101         A       3209
 Exchange two 3054 for one 3102         B       3210
 Exchange two 3054 for one 3103         B       3211
 Exchange two 3054 for one 3104         B       3212
 Exchange one 3054 and 3055 for 3100    A       3213
 Exchange one 3054 and 3055 for 3101    A       3214
 Exchange one 3054 and 3055 for 3102    B       3215
 Exchange one 3054 and 3055 for 3103    B       3216
 Exchange one 3054 and 3055 for 3104    B       3217
 Exchange one 3054 and 3060 for 3101    A       3218
 Exchange one 3054 and 3060 for 3103    B       3219
 Exchange one 3054 and 3060 for 3104    B       3220
 Exchange one 3055 for one 3119         A           3221
 Exchange one 3055 for one 3100         A       3222
 Exchange one 3055 for one 3101         A       3223
 Exchange one 3055 for one 3102         B       3224
 Exchange one 3055 for one 3103         B       3225
 Exchange one 3055 for one 3104         B       3226
 Exchange two 3055 for one 3100         A       3227
 Exchange two 3055 for one 3101         A       3228
 Exchange two 3055 for one 3102         B       3229
 Exchange two 3055 for one 3103         B       3230
 Exchange two 3055 for one 3104         B       3231
 Exchange one 3055 and 3060 for 3101    A       3232
 Exchange one 3055 and 3060 for 3103    B       3233
 Exchange one 3055 and 3060 for 3104    B       3234
 Exchange one 3060 for one 3100         A       3235
 Exchange one 3060 for one 3101         A       3236
 Exchange one 3060 for one 3102         B       3237
 Exchange one 3060 for one 3103         B       3238
 Exchange one 3060 for one 3104         B       3239
 Exchange two 3060 for one 3101         A       3240
Model Designation "A" = Models D35, D45, E35 & E45
Model Designation "B" = Models D50, D60, D70, D80, E50 & E60
                                              (Non-U.S)
                                               Feature
Memory Exchange                       Model     Code
 Exchange two 3060 for one 3103         B       3241
 Exchange two 3060 for one 3104         B       3242
 Exchange three 3060 for one 3104       B       3243
 Exchange four 3060 for one 3104        B       3244
 Exchange one 3061 for one 3102         B       3245
 Exchange one 3061 for one 3103         B       3246
 Exchange one 3061 for one 3104         B       3247
 Exchange two 3061 for one 3103         B       3248
 Exchange two 3061 for one 3104         B       3249
 Exchange three 3061 for one 3104       B       3250
 Exchange four 3061 for one 3104        B       3251
 Exchange one 3109 for one 3103         B       3252
 Exchange one 3109 for one 3104         B       3253
 Exchange two 3109 for one 3104         B       3254
 Exchange one 3119 for one 3100         A       3255
 Exchange one 3119 for one 3101         A       3256
 Exchange one 3119 for one 3102         B       3257
 Exchange one 3119 for one 3103         B       3258
 Exchange one 3119 for one 3104         B       3259
 Exchange two 3119 for one 3102         B       3260
 Exchange two 3119 for one 3103         B       3261
 Exchange two 3119 for one 3104         B       3262
 Exchange one 3119 and 3100 for 3103    B       3263
 Exchange one 3119 and 3100 for 3104    B       3264
 Exchange one 3119 and 3101 for 3104    B       3265
 Exchange one 3100 for one 3101         A       3266
 Exchange one 3100 for one 3102         B       3267
 Exchange one 3100 for one 3103         B       3268
 Exchange one 3100 for one 3104         B       3269
 Exchange two 3100 for one 3103         B       3270
 Exchange two 3100 for one 3104         B       3271
 Exchange one 3100 and 3101 for 3104    B       3272
 Exchange one 3101 for one 3103         B       3273
 Exchange one 3101 for one 3104         B       3274
 Exchange two 3101 for one 3104         B       3275
 Exchange one 3102 for one 3103         B       3276
 Exchange one 3102 for one 3104         B       3277
 Exchange one 3103 for one 3104         B       3278
Model Designation "A" = Models D35, D45, E35 & E45
Model Designation "B" = Models D50, D60, D70, D80, E50 & E60
                                                         (Non-U.S)
                                                          Feature
Memory Exchange                                    Model   Code
 Exchange one #3054 for one #3130                 E70-E95  3281
 Exchange one #3054 for one #3131                    "     3282
 Exchange one #3054 for one #3132                    "     3283
 Exchange two #3054 for one #3130                    "     3284
 Exchange two #3054 for one #3131                    "     3285
 Exchange two #3054 for one #3132                    "        3286
 Exchange one #3054 & one #3055 for one #3130        "     3287
 Exchange one #3054 & one #3055 for one #3131        "     3288
 Exchange one #3054 & one #3055 for one #3132        "     3289
 Exchange one #3054 & one #3060 for one #3130        "     3290
 Exchange one #3054 & one #3060 for one #3131        "     3291
 Exchange one #3054 & one #3060 for one #3132        "     3292
 Exchange one #3055 for one #3130                    "     3293
 Exchange one #3055 for one #3131                    "     3294
 Exchange one #3055 for one #3132                    "     3295
 Exchange two #3055 for one #3130                    "     3296
 Exchange two #3055 for one #3131                    "     3297
 Exchange two #3055 for one #3132                    "     3298
 Exchange one #3055 & one #3060 for one #3130        "     3299
 Exchange one #3055 & one #3060 for one #3131        "     3300
 Exchange one #3055 & one #3060 for one #3132        "     3301
 Exchange one #3060 for one #3130                    "     3302
 Exchange one #3060 for one #3131                    "     3303
 Exchange one #3060 for one #3132                    "     3304
 Exchange two #3060 for one #3130                    "     3305
 Exchange two #3060 for one #3131                    "     3306
 Exchange two #3060 for one #3132                    "     3307
 Exchange three #3060 for one #3131                  "     3308
 Exchange three #3060 for one #3132                  "     3309
 Exchange four #3060 for one #3131                   "     3310
 Exchange four #3060 for one #3132                   "     3311
 Exchange one #3061 for one #3130                    "     3312
 Exchange one #3061 for one #3131                    "     3313
 Exchange one #3061 for one #3132                    "     3314
 Exchange two #3061 for one #3130                    "     3315
 Exchange two #3061 for one #3131                    "     3316
 Exchange two #3061 for one #3132                    "     3317
 Exchange three #3061 for one #3131                  "     3318
 Exchange three #3061 for one #3132                  "     3319
 Exchange four #3061 for one #3131                   "     3320
 Exchange four #3061 for one #3132                   "     3321
 Exchange one #3109 for one #3130                    "     3322
 Exchange one #3109 for one #3131                    "     3323
 Exchange one #3109 for one #3132                    "     3324
 Exchange two #3109 for one #3131                    "     3325
 Exchange two #3109 for one #3132                    "     3326
                                                         (Non-U.S)
                                                          Feature
Memory Exchange                                    Model   Code
 Exchange three #3109 for one #3132                  "     3327
 Exchange four #3109 for one #3132                   "     3328
 Exchange one #3119 for one #3130                 E70-E95  3329
 Exchange one #3119 for one #3131                    "     3330
 Exchange one #3119 for one #3132                    "     3331
 Exchange two #3119 for one #3130                    "     3332
 Exchange two #3119 for one #3131                    "     3333
 Exchange two #3119 for one #3132                    "     3334
 Exchange one #3119 & one #3100 for one #3130        "     3335
 Exchange one #3119 & one #3100 for one #3131        "     3336
 Exchange one #3119 & one #3100 for one #3132        "     3337
 Exchange one #3119 & one #3101 for one #3131        "     3338
 Exchange one #3119 & one #3101 for one #3132        "     3339
 Exchange one #3100 for one #3130                    "     3340
 Exchange one #3100 for one #3131                    "     3341
 Exchange one #3100 for one #3132                    "     3342
 Exchange two #3100 for one #3130                    "     3343
 Exchange two #3100 for one #3131                    "     3344
 Exchange two #3100 for one #3132                    "     3345
 Exchange one #3100 & one #3101 for one #3131        "     3346
 Exchange one #3100 & one #3101 for one #3132        "     3347
 Exchange one #3101 for one #3130                    "     3348
 Exchange one #3101 for one #3131                    "     3349
 Exchange one #3101 for one #3132                    "     3350
 Exchange two #3101 for one #3131                    "     3351
 Exchange two #3101 for one #3132                    "     3352
 Exchange one #3102 for one #3130                    "     3353
 Exchange one #3102 for one #3131                    "     3354
 Exchange one #3102 for one #3132                    "     3355
 Exchange two #3102 for one #3130                    "     3356
 Exchange two #3102 for one #3131                    "     3357
 Exchange two #3102 for one #3132                    "     3358
 Exchange three #3102 for one #3131                  "     3359
 Exchange three #3102 for one #3132                  "     3360
 Exchange four #3102 for one #3131                   "     3361
 Exchange four #3102 for one #3132                   "     3362
 Exchange five #3102 for one #3132                   "     3363
 Exchange one #3102 & one #3103 for one #3131        "     3364
 Exchange one #3102 & one #3103 for one #3132        "     3365
 Exchange one #3102 & one #3104 for one #3132        "     3366
 Exchange one #3102 & one #3103 & one #3104 for one #3132  3367
 Exchange one #3102 & two #3103 for one #3132        "     3368
 Exchange one #3102 & three #3103 for one #3132      "     3369
 Exchange two #3102 & one #3103 for one #3131        "     3370
 Exchange two #3102 & one #3103 for one #3132        "     3371
 Exchange two #3102 & one #3104 for one #3132        "     3372
                                                         (Non-U.S)
                                                          Feature
Memory Exchange                                    Model   Code
 Exchange two #3102 & two #3103 for one #3132        "     3373
 Exchange two #3102 & three #3103 for one #3132      "     3374
 Exchange two #3102 & one #3103 & one #3104 for one #3132  3375
 Exchange three #3102 & one #3103 for one #3132   E70-E95  3376
 Exchange three #3102 & one #3104 for one #3132      "     3377
 Exchange three #3102 & two #3103 for one #3132      "     3378
 Exchange four #3102 & one #3103 for one #3132       "     3379
 Exchange four #3102 & one #3104 for one #3132       "     3380
 Exchange one #3103 for one #3130                    "     3381
 Exchange one #3103 for one #3131                    "     3382
 Exchange one #3103 for one #3132                    "     3383
 Exchange two #3103 for one #3131                    "     3384
 Exchange two #3103 for one #3132                    "     3385
 Exchange three #3103 for one #3132                  "     3386
 Exchange four #3103 for one #3132                   "     3387
 Exchange one #3103 & one #3104 for one #3132        "     3388
 Exchange two #3103 & one #3104 for one #3132        "     3389
 Exchange one #3104 for one #3131                    "     3390
 Exchange one #3104 for one #3132                    "     3391
 Exchange two #3104 for one #3132                    "     3392
 Exchange one #3130 for one #3131                    "     3393
 Exchange one #3130 for one #3132                    "     3394
 Exchange one #3131 for one #3132                    "     3395
 Exchange one #3104 for two #3130                    "     3396
 One for two exchange identifier (No Charge)         "     3397
 Exchange two #3131 for one #3132                 E90/E95  3398
                                                              (Non-US)
                                                               Feature
Memory Exchange                                    Model        Code
(F45 upgrades)
 Exchange one #3140 for one #3141                   F45         3836
 Exchange one #3140 for one #3142                   F45         3837
 Exchange one #3141 for one #3142                   F45         3838
(F70-F97 upgrades)
 Exchange one #3133 for one #3134                F70 - F97      3839
 Exchange two #3133 for one #3134                F70 - F97      3840
(D35/45,E35/45,F35 to F45)
 Exchange one #3119 for one #3140                   F45         3859
 Exchange one #3119 for one #3141                   F45         3860
 Exchange one #3119 for one #3142                   F45         3861
 Exchange two #3119 for one #3141                   F45         3862
 Exchange two #3119 for one #3142                   F45         3863
 Exchange one #3119 and one #3100 for one #3142     F45         3864
 Exchange one #3100 for one #3141                   F45         3865
 Exchange one #3100 for one #3142                   F45         3866
 Exchange two #3100 for one #3142                   F45         3867
 Exchange one #3101 for one #3142                   F45         3868
                                                              (Non-US)
                                                               Feature
Memory Exchange                                    Model        Code
(F45 to F50)
 Exchange one #3140 for one #3102                   F50         3869
 Exchange one #3140 for one #3103                   F50         3870
 Exchange one #3140 for one #3104                   F50         3871
 Exchange two #3140 for one #3102                   F50         3872
 Exchange two #3140 for one #3103                   F50         3873
 Exchange two #3140 for one #3104                   F50         3874
 Exchange one #3140 and one #3141 for one #3103     F50         3875
 Exchange one #3140 and one #3141 for one #3104     F50         3876
 Exchange one #3140 and one #3142 for one #3104     F50         3877
 Exchange one #3141 for one #3102                   F50         3878
 Exchange one #3141 for one #3103                   F50         3879
 Exchange one #3141 for one #3104                   F50         3880
 Exchange two #3141 for one #3103                   F50         3881
 Exchange two #3141 for one #3104                   F50         3882
 Exchange one #3141 and one #3142 for one #3104     F50         3883
 Exchange one #3142 for one #3103                   F50         3884
 Exchange one #3142 for one #3104                   F50         3885
 Exchange two #3142 (32MB) for one #3104            F50         3886
                                                              (Non-U.S)
                                                               Feature
Memory Exchange                                    Model        Code
(F45 to F60)
 Exchange one #3140 for one #3130                   F60         3887
 Exchange one #3140 for one #3131                   F60         3888
 Exchange one #3140 for one #3132                   F60         3889
 Exchange two #3140 for one #3130                   F60         3890
 Exchange two #3140 for one #3131                   F60         3891
 Exchange two #3140 for one #3132                   F60         3892
 Exchange one #3140 & one #3141 for one #3130       F60         3893
 Exchange one #3140 & one #3141 for one #3131       F60         3894
 Exchange one #3140 & one #3141 for one #3132       F60         3895
 Exchange one #3140 & one #3142 for one #3131       F60         3896
 Exchange one #3140 & one #3142 for one #3132       F60         3897
 Exchange one #3141 for one #3130                   F60         3898
 Exchange one #3141 for one #3131                   F60         3899
 Exchange one #3141 for one #3132                   F60         3901
 Exchange two #3141 for one #3130                   F60         3902
 Exchange two #3141 for one #3131                   F60         3903
 Exchange two #3141 for one #3132                   F60         3904
 Exchange one #3141 & one #3142 for one #3131       F60         3905
 Exchange one #3141 & one #3142 for one #3132       F60         3906
 Exchange one #3142 for one #3130                   F60         3907
 Exchange one #3142 for one #3131                   F60         3908
 Exchange   one #3142 for one #3132                   F60         3909
 Exchange two #3142 for one #3131                   F60         3910
 Exchange two #3142 for one #3132                   F60         3911
                                                              (Non-US)
                                                               Feature
Memory Exchange                                    Model        Code
(D35/45,E35/45,F35 to F70-F97)
 Exchange one #3119 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3912
 Exchange one #3119 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3913
 Exchange two #3119 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3914
 Exchange two #3119 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3915
 Exchange one #3119 & one #3100 for one #3133       F70 - F97     3916
 Exchange one #3119 & one #3100 for one #3134       F70 - F97     3917
 Exchange one #3119 & one #3101 for one #3133       F70 - F97     3918
 Exchange one #3119 & one #3101 for one #3134       F70 - F97     3919
 Exchange one #3100 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3920
 Exchange one #3100 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3921
 Exchange two #3100 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3922
 Exchange two #3100 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3923
 Exchange one #3100 & one #3101 for one #3133       F70 - F97     3924
 Exchange one #3100 & one #3101 for one #3134       F70 - F97     3925
 Exchange one #3101 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3926
 Exchange one #3101 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3927
 Exchange two #3101 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3928
 Exchange two #3101 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3929
 Exchange one #3119 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3469
 Exchange two #3119 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3470
 Exchange one #3119 & one #3100 for one #3135       F70 - F97     3471
 Exchange one #3119 & one #3101 for one #3135       F70 - F97     3472
 Exchange one #3100 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3473
 Exchange two #3100 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3474
 Exchange one #3100 & one #3101 for one #3135       F70 - F97     3475
 Exchange one #3101 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3476
 Exchange two #3101 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3477
                                                              (Non-US)
                                                               Feature
Memory Exchange                                    Model        Code
(F45 to F70-F97)
 Exchange one #3140 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3930
 Exchange one #3140 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3931
 Exchange two #3140 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3932
 Exchange two #3140 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3933
 Exchange one #3140 & one #3141 for one #3133       F70 - F97     3934
 Exchange one #3140 & one #3141 for one #3134       F70 - F97     3935
 Exchange one #3140 & one #3142 for one #3133       F70 - F97     3936
 Exchange one #3140 & one #3142 for one #3134       F70 - F97     3937
 Exchange one #3141 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3938
 Exchange one #3141 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3939
 Exchange two #3141 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3940
 Exchange two #3141 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3941
 Exchange one #3141 & one #3142 for one #3133       F70 - F97     3942
                                                                (Non-U.S)
                                                                 Feature
Memory Exchange                                    Model          Code
 Exchange one #3141 & one #3142 for one #3134       F70 - F97     3943
 Exchange one #3142 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3944
 Exchange one #3142 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3945
 Exchange two #3142 for one #3133                   F70 - F97          3946
 Exchange two #3142 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3947
                                                                (Non-US)
                                                                 Feature
Memory Exchange                                    Model          Code
(D50-D80, E50/E60, F50 to F70-F97)
 Exchange one #3102 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3401
 Exchange one #3102 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3402
 Exchange two #3102 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3403
 Exchange two #3102 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3404
 Exchange three #3102 for one #3133                 F70 - F97     3405
 Exchange three #3102 for one #3134                 F70 - F97     3406
 Exchange four #3102 for one #3133                  F70 - F97     3407
 Exchange four #3102 for one #3134                  F70 - F97     3408
 Exchange five #3102 for one #3134                  F70 - F97     3409
 Exchange one #3102 & one #3103 for one #3133       F70 - F97     3410
 Exchange one #3102 & one #3103 for one #3134       F70 - F97     3411
 Exchange one #3102 & one #3104 for one #3134       F70 - F97     3412
 Exc one #3102 & one #3103 & one #3104 for #3134    F70 - F97     3413
 Exchange one #3102 & two #3103 for one #3134       F70 - F97     3414
 Exchange one #3102 & three #3103 for one #3134     F70 - F97     3415
 Exchange two #3102 & one #3103 for one #3133       F70 - F97     3416
 Exchange two #3102 & one #3103 for one #3134       F70 - F97     3417
 Exchange two #3102 & one #3104 for one #3134       F70 - F97     3418
 Exchange two #3102 & two #3103 for one #3134       F70 - F97     3419
 Exchange two #3102 & three #3103 for one #3134     F70 - F97     3420
 Exchange two #3102 & one #3103 & one #3104         F70 - F97     3421
 Exchange three #3102 & one #3103 for one #3134     F70 - F97     3422
 Exchange three #3102 & one #3104 for one #3134     F70 - F97     3423
 Exchange three #3102 & two #3103 for one #3134     F70 - F97     3424
 Exchange four #3102 & one #3103 for one #3134      F70 - F97     3425
 Exchange four #3102 & one #3104 for one #3134      F70 - F97     3426
 Exchange one #3103 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3427
 Exchange one #3103 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3428
 Exchange two #3103 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3429
 Exchange two #3103 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3430
 Exchange three #3103 for one #3134                 F70 - F97     3431
 Exchange four #3103 for one #3134                  F70 - F97     3432
 Exchange one #3103 & one #3104 for one #3134       F70 - F97     3433
 Exchange two #3103 & one #3104 for one #3134       F70 - F97     3434
 Exchange one #3104 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3435
 Exchange one #3104 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3436
 Exchange two #3104 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3437
                                                                (Non-U.S)
                                                                 Feature
Memory Exchange                                    Model          Code
(E70-E95,F60 to F70-F97)
 Exchange one #3130 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3438
 Exchange one #3130 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3439
 Exchange two #3130 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3440
 Exchange two #3130 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3441
 Exchange three #3130 for one #3134                 F70 - F97     3442
 Exchange four #3130 for one #3134                  F70 - F97     3443
 Exchange one #3130 & one #3131 for one #3134       F70 - F97     3444
 Exchange two #3130 & one #3131 for one #3134       F70 - F97     3445
 Exchange one #3131 for one #3133                   F70 - F97     3446
 Exchange one #3131 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3447
 Exchange two #3131 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3448
 Exchange one #3132 for one #3134                   F70 - F97     3449
(F45 to F70-F97)
 Exchange one #3140 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3478
 Exchange two #3140 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3479
 Exchange one #3140 & one #3141 for one #3135       F70 - F97     3480
 Exchange one #3140 & one #3142 for one #3135       F70 - F97     3481
 Exchange one #3141 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3482
 Exchange two #3141 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3483
 Exchange one #3141 & one #3142 for one #3135       F70 - F97     3484
 Exchange one #3142 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3485
 Exchange two #3142 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3486
(D50-D80, E50/E60, F50 to F70-F97)
 Exchange one #3102 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3487
 Exchange one #3102, one #3103 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3488
 Exch 1 #3102, 1 #3103, 1 #3104 for #3135           F70 - F97     3489
 Exch 1 #3102, 1 #3103, 2 #3104 for #3135           F70 - F97     3490
 Exch 1 #3102, 1 #3103, 3 #3104 for #3135           F70 - F97     3491
 Exchange one #3102, two #3103 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3492
 Exch 1 #3102, 2 #3103, 1 #3104 for #3135           F70 - F97     3493
 Exch 1 #3102, 2 #3103, 2 #3104 for #3135           F70 - F97     3494
 Exchange one #3102 & three #3103 for one #3135     F70 - F97     3495
 Exch 1 #3102, 3 #3103, 1 #3104 for #3135           F70 - F97     3496
 Exchange one #3102, four #3103 for one #3135       F70 - F97     3497
 Exchange one #3102, one #3104 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3498
 Exchange one #3102, two #3104 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3499
 Exchange one #3102, three #3104 for one #3135      F70 - F97     3500
 Exchange two #3102 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3501
 Exchange two #3102, one #3103 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3502
 Exch 2 #3102, 1 #3103, 1 #3104 for one #3135       F70 - F97     3503
 Exch 2 #3102, 1 #3103, 2 #3104 for one #3135       F70 - F97     3504
 Exchange two #3102, two #3103 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3505
                                                                (Non-U.S)
                                                                 Feature
Memory Exchange                                    Model          Code
 Exch 2 #3102, 2 #3103, 1 #3104 for one #3135       F70 - F97     3506
 Exchange two #3102, three #3103 for one #3135      F70 - F97     3507
 Exchange two #3102, one #3104 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3508
 Exchange two #3102, two #3104 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3509
 Exchange two #3102, three #3104 for one #3135      F70 - F97     3510
 Exchange three #3102 for one #3135                 F70 - F97     3511
 Exchange three #3102, one #3103 for one #3135      F70 - F97     3512
 Exch 3 #3102, 1 #3103, 1 #3104 for one #3135       F70 - F97     3513
 Exchange three #3102, two #3103 for one #3135      F70 - F97     3514
 Exchange three #3102, one #3104 for one #3135      F70 - F97     3515
 Exchange three #3102, two #3104 for one #3135      F70 - F97     3516
 Exchange four #3102 for one #3135                  F70 - F97     3517
 Exchange four #3102, one #3103 for one #3135       F70 - F97     3518
 Exchange four #3102, one #3104 for one #3135       F70 - F97     3519
 Exchange five #3102 for one #3135                  F70 - F97     3520
 Exchange one #3103 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3521
 Exchange one #3103, one #3104 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3522
 Exchange one #3103, two #3104 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3523
 Exchange one #3103, three #3104 for one #3135      F70 - F97     3524
 Exchange two #3103 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3525
 Exchange two #3103, one #3104 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3526
 Exchange two #3103, two #3104 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3527
 Exchange two #3103, three #3104 for one #3135      F70 - F97     3528
 Exchange three #3103 for one #3135                 F70 - F97     3529
 Exchange three #3103, one #3104  for one #3135      F70 - F97     3530
 Exchange three #3103, two #3104 for one #3135      F70 - F97     3531
 Exchange four #3103 for one #3135                  F70 - F97     3532
 Exchange four #3103, one #3104 for one #3135       F70 - F97     3533
 Exchange five #3103 for one #3135                  F70 - F97     3534
 Exchange one #3104 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3535
 Exchange two #3104 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3536
 Exchange three #3104 for one #3135                 F70 - F97     3537
 Exchange four #3104 for one #3135                  F70 - F97     3538
(E70-E95,F60 to F70-F97)
 Exchange one #3130 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3539
 Exchange one #3130, one #3131 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3540
 Exch 1 #3130, 1 #3131, 1 #3132 for #3135           F70 - F97     3541
 Exchange one #3130, two #3131 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3542
 Exchange one #3130, three #3131 for one #3135      F70 - F97     3543
 Exchange one #3130, one #3132 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3544
 Exchange two #3130 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3545
 Exchange two #3130, one #3131 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3546
 Exch 2 #3130, 1 #3131, 1 #3132 for #3135           F70 - F97     3547
 Exchange two #3130, two #3131 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3548
 Exchange two #3130, three #3131 for one #3135      F70 - F97     3549
                                                                (Non-U.S)
                                                                 Feature
Memory Exchange                                    Model          Code
 Exchange two #3130, one #3132 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3550
 Exchange three #3130 for one #3135                 F70 - F97     3551
 Exchange three #3130, one #3131 for one #3135      F70 - F97     3552
 Exchange three #3130, two #3131 for one #3135      F70 - F97     3553
 Exchange three #3130, one #3132 for one #3135      F70 - F97     3554
 Exchange four #3130 for one #3135                  F70 - F97     3555
 Exchange four #3130, one #3131 for one #3135       F70 - F97     3556
 Exchange four #3130, one #3132 for one #3135       F70 - F97     3557
 Exchange five #3130 for one #3135                  F70 - F97     3558
 Exchange one #3131 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3559
 Exchange two #3131 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3560
 Exchange three #3131 for one #3135                 F70 - F97     3561
 Exchange four #3131 for one #3135                  F70 - F97     3562
 Exchange one #3132 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3563
 Exchange two #3132 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3564
(F70-F97 Growth)
 Exchange one #3133 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3565
 Exchange one #3133, one #3134 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3566
 Exchange two #3133 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3567
 Exchange two #3133, one #3134 for one #3135        F70 - F97     3568
 Exchange three #3133 for one #3135                 F70 - F97     3569
 Exchange four #3133 for one #3135                  F70 - F97     3570
 Exchange one #3134 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3571
 Exchange two #3134 for one #3135                   F70 - F97     3572
                                                         (Non-U.S)
                                                          Feature
Other Feature Exchanges                                   Code
 Exchange one #2611 for one #6501                          3573
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)
 Exchange two #2611 for one #6501                          3574
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)
 Exchange one #6500 for one #6501                          3575
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)
 Exchange two #6500 for one #6501                          3576
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)
 Exchange one #2611 for one #2621                              3577
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)
 IBM Token-Ring Subsystem upgrade                          6241
 Exchange #2601 and 9346-001 for #6366                     6401
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
 Exchange #2602 for #2621                                  6402
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)
 Exchange #2607 for #2621                                  6407
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)
 Exchange #2608 for #2621                                  6408
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)
 Exchange #6110 for #6112                                  6410
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)
 Exchange #6111 for #6112                                  6411
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)
 Exchange #8110 for #6112                                  6412
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)
 Exchange #8111 for #6112                                  6413
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)
 Exchange #2611 for #6500                                  6414
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 1, 1997)
 Convert #6220 Base Expansion to #6231                     6420
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
 Convert #6221 Base Expansion to #6232                     6421
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
 Convert #6222 Base Expansion to #6237                     6422
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
 Convert #6223 Base Expansion to #6235                     6423
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
 Convert #6224 Base Expansion to #6238                     6424
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
 Convert #6239 Two line Comm w/RPO to #6230                6439
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
 Exchange #2601 and 9346-001 for #6368                     6440
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
 Exchange #2604 for #2644                                  6441
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
 Integrate at Vimercate                                    9992
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)
 Machine supplied from stock - EMEA                        9993
 Upgrade order - EMEA                                      9995
(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of July 31, 1996)

9337 Model Summary

              Disk        Max  GBs       Upgrade    9406    9406 DASD
 Type/Mod    Drives   Base Mode HA Mode  From Mods  Models   Controller
 ---------   ------   --------- -------  ---------  ------   ----------
 9337-210    542MB      4.33     3.79     10, 110    D,E,F     #6501
 9337-220    970MB      7.76     6.79     20, 120    D,E,F     #6501
 9337-215    542MB      4.33     3.79     15, 115    D,E,F     #6501
 9337-225    970MB      7.76     6.79     25, 125    D,E,F     #6501
 9337-240   1967MB     15.73    13.76     40, 140    D,E,F     #6501
 9337-15     542MB      3.79      --        None     B         #2611
                                                     D,E,F     #6500
 9337-115    542MB       --      3.25     15         B         #2611
                                                     D,E,F     #6500
 9337-25     970MB      6.79      --        None     B         #2611
                                                     D,E,F     #6500
 9337-125    970MB       --      5.82     25         B         #2611
                                                     D,E,F     #6500
 9337-420    970MB       7.76    6.79                D,E,F     #6501
 9337-440   1967MB      15.73   13.76                D,E,F     #6501
 9337-480   4194MB      33.55   29.35                D,E,F     #6501

For assistance with installation planning, System Assurance and availability expectations, contact the Availability Support Center at 1-800-365-4426, extension 200.

Mirroring Support

Customers can mirror the new Base (non-RAID) models with prior 9337 Base (non-RAID) models that have the same disk drive capacity. The 9337 mirroring combinations can be between any two of the following models:

·                     Models 10, 15, 210 and 215 in Base mode

·                     Models 20, 25, 220 and 225 in Base mode

·                     Models 40, and 240 in Base mode

Plant Activated DASD Mirroring

With increased system DASD capacity, managing DASD availability is becoming more important. Beginning with OS/400 Version 2 Release 3, orders for 9406 systems with Disk-Level Mirroring (#0040), IOP-Level Mirroring (#0042), Bus-Level Mirroring (#0043) or Device Parity Protection (#0044) specified, will be shipped from the plant of manufacture with the mirroring function activated for all non-RAID DASD. This plant activated option will save time in the installation process. Mirroring can protect against unplanned system outages caused by unprotected internal or external DASD failures. If mirroring is later determined inappropriate, it can be deactivated.

9119 Migration DASD Specify Code CFAS400 will include #9119 on a order when DASD is to be migrated on a new system order. In addition to adding #9119, CFAS400:

·                     Insures rack space is available for all migrated devices in addition to all ordered devices.

·                     Insures the availability of the right number of IOPS for migrated DASD as well as ordered DASD in non-mirroring and mirroring situations.

The potential level of mirroring can not be identified in manufacturing if DASD is being migrated.

There is a requirement that must be satisfied before migrating 9332/9335 DASD subsystems to a 9406 system.

These specify codes are withdrawn:

Specify
Code       Description
#9121      9309-1, 1 9332-400
#9122      9309-1, 2 9332-400s
#9123      9309-1, 3 9332-400s
#9124      9309-1, 4 9332-400s
#9131      9309-2, 1 9335A,  1 9335B
#9132      9309-2, 1 9335A,  2 9335Bs
#9133      9309-2, 1 9335A,  3 9335Bs
#9134      9309-2, 1 9335A,  4 9335Bs
#9135      9309-2, 2 9335As, 3 9335Bs
#9136      9309-2, 2 9335As, 4 9335Bs
#9137      9309-2, 2 9335As, 2 9335Bs
#9138      9332-220 Standalone Model
(For IBM US, withdrawn from marketing as of March 20, 1995)
#9139      9332-420 Standalone Model
(For IBM US, withdrawn from marketing as of March 20, 1995)

For new systems, the above specify codes were be ordered on the 9406 system order. For installed systems, the codes were ordered via MES. Ordering these DASD migration specify codes resulted in shipment of the appropriate instructions and hardware to install the migration DASD configuration, and permitted the utilization of unused space in migrating DASD racks.

The requirement for migration involves potential changes to the subsystem components to make them operable on the 9406. The subsystem components affected may include the 9332 Direct Access Storage Devices, the 9335 Direct Access Storage Subsystem or the 9309 Rack Enclosure. Listed here are the modifications which, if required, must be ordered and installed before the unit can be moved to a 9406 System Unit.

·                     9332 Model 220 to Model 200 conversion - RPQ 845102.

·                     9332 Model 420 to Model 400 conversion - RPQ 845104.

These RPQs must be ordered for the conversion of stand-alone models to rack-mount models for installation in the 9309 Rack Enclosure. Stand-alone models are not supported on the 9406.

·                     9309 primary rack to secondary rack conversion.

All rack enclosures beyond the first on a 9406 must be at the #9202 Subsequent Enclosure specify level. Order via MES, specify code #9119 on the installed 9309. This code will provide for the modification of each 9309 Model 001 or 002 with #9201, Primary Enclosure, to Specify Code #9202, Subsequent Enclosure. There is a charge for this feature.

·                     9335-A01 Controller EC level upgrade - EC 397013A

A 9335-A01 being installed on a 9406 must be at EC level 397013A or later to ensure proper operation and integrity. A "white label" on the front plate behind the decorative cover will identify units at this EC level with the words "EC 397013A installed." If required, the EC should be ordered through the local NSD branch office.

These modifications are not extensive and should be planned to be done after the units are removed from the currently installed system.

All migrations of DASD subsystems to the 9406 will require one of the DASD Migration Aids Specify Codes on the 9406 System Unit order. Most migrations will also require one or more of the subsystem device modifications. Be sure that both are ordered if required.

Diskette Units

9331 Diskette Unit Models 001 and 002

The Model 001 is an eight-inch diskette unit packaged in a rack mountable unit. The unit is attached to the 9406 via the Magnetic Storage Device Controller (#6112). The eight-inch diskette unit allows the customer to migrate and exchange data with existing eight-inch based systems and data entry devices such as System/36 Models 5360, 5362 and System/38 Model 5382 System Units.

The Model 002 is a 5 1/4-inch diskette drive packaged in a rack mountable unit. The unit is attached to the 9406 via the Magnetic Storage Device Controller (#6112). The 5-1/4-inch diskette drive is used for data interchange with 5 1/4-inch based System/36 Model 5363 or 5364.

Limitation: Must be installed in a one of the following rack enclosures:

·                     9406 System Unit

·                     9406 System Unit Expansion (#5042)

·                     9406 Bus Extension Unit (#5040)

·                     I/O Expansion Rack (9309 #9129)

·                     General Purpose Expansion Rack (9309 #9141)

·                     General Purpose I/O Rack (9309 #9171)

·                     9332 Disk Unit Rack (9309 #9177 and #9277)

Maximum: Two per system - Models 001 and 002 may be mixed or matched and each provides 1.2MB of storage.

Tape Devices

2440 Tape I/O Subsystem (withdrawn from marketing)

The 2440 Tape I/O Subsystem, Model A12, is a 1/2-inch reel-to-reel tape drive. It is a start/stop drive and is provided for alternate IPL, program distribution, and 1/2-inch reel tape interchange. It has an instantaneous data rate of 120KB per second at 1600bpi and 468KB per second at 6250bpi. One or two 2440 Tape I/O Subsystems attach to the 9406 via the Removable Media Device Attachment (#2621). The Model A12 is packaged in a stand-alone 1.6 meter high rack.

The 2440 Tape drive supports 1.5 mil thick tape media up to a maximum of 2400 feet.

Attachment cables for the 2440 can be ordered by part number:

·                     4 Meter cable P/N 6495268

·                     12 Meter cable P/N 6495266

·                     20 Meter cable P/N 21F4980

Maximum: See Magnetic Tape Configuration Table.

3422 Magnetic Tape Subsystem (withdrawn from marketing)

The 3422 is a 1/2-inch reel-to-reel intermediate performance tape subsystem. The 3422 reads or writes data at 6250bpi at a nominal data rate of 780KB per second or 1600bpi at a nominal data rate of 200KB per second. It is a start/stop drive and is provided for alternate IPL, program distribution, and 1/2-inch reel tape interchange.

The 3422 consists of a Model A01 with a tape controller and one tape drive and a Model B01 with one tape drive and no controller. A maximum of three B01s can be attached to a Model A01 for a total of four drives per string. The 3422 attaches to the 9406 via the 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment (#2622), or the 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment/HP (#2644). OS/400 Version 2 Release 1.1 is required for feature #2644.

The 3422 Tape drive supports 1.5 mil thick tape media up to a maximum of 2400 feet. Maximum: See Magnetic Tape Configuration Table.

3430 Magnetic Tape Subsystem (withdrawn from marketing)

The 3430 is a 1/2-inch reel-to-reel medium performance tape subsystem. The 3430 reads or writes data at 6250bpi at a nominal data rate of 312KB per second or 1600bpi at a nominal data rate of 80KB per second. It is a start/stop drive and is provided for alternate IPL, program distribution, and 1/2-inch reel tape interchange.

The 3430 consists of a Model A01 with a tape controller and one tape drive and a Model B01 with one tape drive and no controller. A maximum of three B01s can be attached to a Model A01 for a total of four drives per string. The 3430 attaches to the 9406 via the 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment (#2622), or the 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment/HP (#2644). OS/400 Version 2 Release 1.1 is required for feature #2644.

The 3430 Tape drive supports 1.5 mil thick tape media up to a maximum of 2400 feet. Maximum: See Magnetic Tape Configuration Table.

3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem

The 3480 is a 1/2-inch cartridge high performance tape subsystem with a capacity of up to 200MB per Cartridge System Tape. The 3480 reads and writes at an instantaneous data rate of 3MB per second. It is provided for program distribution, alternate IPL, save/restore, and 1/2-inch cartridge tape interchange. The Improved Data Recording Capability (IDRC) feature of the 3480, which is supported by OS/400 Version 2 Release 1, can increase the amount of data that can be stored on a cartridge by up to three times, depending on the data. The 3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem provides concurrent operations when attached to more than one host system.

One 3480 A11 control unit and up to eight B11 tape drives or one A22 control unit and up to eight B22 tape drives attach to the 9406 via the 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment (#2622), or the 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Attachment/HP (#2644). OS/400 Version 2 Release 1.1 is required for feature #2644. Maximum: See Magnetic Tape Configuration Table.

3490/3490E Magnetic Tape Subsystem Models AXX-DXX

The 3490/3490E is a high performance 1/2-inch cartridge tape subsystem with a range of models that read and write at an instantaneous data rate of up to 3MB per second when attached with feature #2644. The 3490 models use the Cartridge System Tape media, providing up to 200 MB per cartridge. The 3490E models use either the Cartridge System Tape media with up to 400MB per cartridge or the Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape media with up to 800MB per cartridge. The models are differentiated as follows:

·                     3490 Models A01, A02, B02, B04, D31, and D32 (all withdrawn from marketing) can read and write in 18 track format.

·                     3490E Models A10, A20, B20, B40, C10, C11, and C22

·                     3490E Models D41 and D42 (withdrawn from marketing)

o                                            can only read data from the Cartridge System Tape media in 18 track format written by 3480 or 3490 models.

o                                            can read and write the Cartridge System Tape media in 36 track format.

o                                            can read and write the Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape in 36 track format.

·                     Cartridges written by the 3490E models cannot be read by the 3480 or 3490 models.

The 3490 and 3490E models are provided for program distribution, alternate IPL, save/restore, and 1/2-inch cartridge tape interchange. The 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem provides concurrent operations when attached to more than one host system.

The 3490 and 3490E models are floor standing units except the 3490E C10, C11, and C22 which are functionally equivalent to the 3490E D41 and D42 but mount into a system rack. The C models must be installed in one of the following rack enclosures:

·                     9309 Model 2 Rack Enclosure with either Specify Code #9141 or #9171.

·                     System Unit Expansion (#5042)

·                     Bus Extension Unit (#5040)

·                     Primary to Secondary Rack (#5043)

(For IBM US, No Longer Available as of March 31, 1999)

3490E feature #5037, Parallel Channel Attachment, is a prerequisite on Models C10, C11, and C22 for attachment to the AS400 Advanced Systems.

The Automatic Cartridge Loader (ACL) feature accepts six 1/2-inch tape cartridges, five in the ACL and one in the drive. It is standard on the BXX, C11 and C22 models, a feature on the DXX models and not supported on the C10.

The Improved Data Recording Capability (IDRC) can increase the amount of data that can be stored on a cartridge by up to three times, depending on the data. It is standard on the 3490E models and a feature on the 3490 models.

Maximum unattended save capacities per drive are as follows:

·                     3.6 GB on the 3490 with Cartridge System Tape media, IDRC and ACL.

·                     7.2 GB on the 3490E with Cartridge System Tape media, IDRC and ACL.

·                     14.4 GB on the 3490E with Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape, IDRC and ACL.

This results in up to 28.8GB unattended save capacity on a 3490E Model C22.

Following are the 3490 and 3490E Control Unit Models which attach to the above features:

·                     3490 Model A01 can support a total of eight drives

·                     3490 Model A02 can support a total of eight drives when attached to the AS/400

·                     3490 Model D31 has one drive

·                     3490 Model D32 has two drives

·                     3490E Model A10 can support a total of eight drives

·                     3490E Model A20 can support a total of eight drives when attached to the AS/400

·                     3490E Model C10 has one drive

·                     3490E Model C11 has one drive

·                     3490E Model C22 has two drives

·                     3490E Model D41 has one drive

·                     3490E Model D42 has two drives

The following models can attach to the 3490 A01 or A02 Control Unit Models:

·                     3490 Model B02 has two drives

·                     3490 Model B04 has four drives

The following models can attach to the 3490E A10 or A20 Control Unit Models:

·                     3490 Model B20 has two drives

·                     3490 Model B40 has four drives

The 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystems can be shared between AS/400 systems, System/370 and System/390 as follows:

·                     3490/3490E Models CXX and DXX support one or two hosts.

·                     3490/3490E Models A01 and A10 support one to four hosts.

·                     3490/3490E Models A02 and A20 support one to eight hosts.

3490E Magnetic Tape Subsystem Models E01 and E11

The 3490E E01 and E11 models are media compatible with the current 3490E models, but offer a lower cost, smaller size, increased performance, and increased Cartridge Stack Loader (CSL) capacity. The new models include rack-mount and table-top versions, both with a seven cartridge CSL. Each model has an integrated control unit and one tape drive. Data compaction with Improved Data Recording Capability (IDRC) provides up to three times compaction. With IDRC, data transfer rates up to 4.9MB/sec are obtained. Unattended save capacity up to 16.8GB is provided. One or two 3490E E models are supported using #6501.

The 3490E EXX models cannot be shared between two systems, and distance from the system is limited to 82 feet (25 meters). The 3490E CXX models should be selected when system sharing is required, and/or distance up to 400 feet (121 meters) is required. Also, the 3490E EXX models cannot be migrated to the Magstar 3494 Tape Library Model L10, while the 3490E CXX models can.

Maximum: See AS/400 Model Summary tables.

3490E Tape Drive Models F00, F01 and F11

Model F00 is a single drive. Model F01 is floor-standing and the F11 is rack-mounted, both with a standard 10 cartridge autoloader. Each model reads and writes 36-track tape cartridges, and reads 18-track 1/2-inch tape cartridges. Native performance is 3MB/s. IDRC data compaction is provided. OS/400 V3R1, or later, is required.

Maximums: See AS/400 Model Summary tables.

Magstar 3494 Tape Library

The Magstar 3494 Tape Library Model L10 is stand-alone, automated tape-storage subsystem designed to provide unattended tape operation.

The 3494 Tape Library Dataserver Models L12 and L14 offer the high reliability and high availability features of the Model L10 with the added support of the 3590 High Performance Tape Subsystem Model B1A. This allows customers to automate tape data handling with the latest technology. The ability to support the 3490E and 3590 technology in the same library offers customers a fast and convenient way to manage these tape medias.

Using Backup Recovery and Media Services/400 (5763-BR1) Version 3 Release 1 or later, the 3494 provides automated system backup and recovery. Use of this product along with an IBM Services Offering is optional, but recommended.

3494 Highlights:

·                     Flexible configurations with modular expandability with 1-16 frames

·                     Supports 1 to 46 Magstar 3590 or 1-16 3490E tape transports

·                     Supports 160 - 6,210 1/2" tape cartridges

·                     Stores up to 186TB with data compaction

·                     Installed 3490E CXX tape drives can be converted for library use

·                     Optional convenience I/O station (10 or 30 cartridges)

·                     Library sharing capability among multiple systems

·                     Supports manual mode operation

The 3490E-CXA and 3590-B1A tape drives within the library attach to the AS/400 in the same way as the 3490E-CXX and 3490 B1A tape drives. On the AS/400, one EIA 232/V.24 Line Adapter or a LAN attachment is required for each 3494 Tape Library.

Maximums: See AS/400 Model Summary tables.

Magstar MP Tape Subsystem

The Magstar MP Tape Subsystem is an automated tape subsystem for the AS/400 providing high levels of reliability, with lower price, capacity and performance than the 3590. Device native data rate is 2.2MB/sec, and up to 6.6MB/sec with compaction. Native capacity is 5GB per cartridge, and up to 15GB per cartridge with compaction. The Magstar MP tape cartridge is a new, unique design.

The Magstar MP Tape Subsystem is available in five models. The B00 is a stand-alone drive. The B01 and B11 are automated models with a single tape drives, supporting random access to two removable magazines, each supporting ten tape cartridges, with a total capacity of up to 300GB with compaction. The B01 is stand-alone, and the B11 is a rack mounted.

The B02 and the B12 are also automated models, supporting two tape drives and a total capacity up to 300GB with compaction. The B02 is stand-alone, and the B12 is a rack mounted. Models B02 and B12 support two modes of operation: Base Mode and Split Mode. In Base Mode, both drives are attached to a single host with access to 20 tapes for a maximum capacity of 300GB compacted. When configured in Split Mode, the 3570 subsystem is effectively split into two separate 10-cartridge libraries. In Split Mode, the 3570 attaches to two hosts, with each host accessing one drive and 10 tape cartridges for a maximum capacity of 150GB with compaction. This mode provides an effective solution for high-capacity, unattended backup, and does not require switches or recabling.

The Magstar MP Tape Subsystem attaches to all AS/400 DXX and later models, except the D02, E02, F02, and P03. Attachment is with feature #6501 (Tape/Disk Device Controller), supporting one or two drives. Alternate IPL is supported.

Backup Recovery and Media Services/400 (BRMS/400) is recommended to support automation in tape handling, media management, and automatic migration of data between tape and DASD based on user defined policies. For those developing unique applications, OS/400 provides a command interface.

IBM software distribution will not be provided on Magstar MP media for OS/400 V3R1 or V3R2 (see RPQ 843910 for additional information). A second tape drive will be required. The Magstar MP Tape Subsystem cannot be shared by two systems. OS/400 V3R1 or later and PTFs are required.

3590 High Performance Tape Subsystem

The 3590 is a new automated tape subsystem for the AS/400, reaching higher levels of reliability, capacity and performance. The drive rate of 9 MB per second is three times faster than previous IBM 3480, 3490 or 3490E tape drives, allowing tape applications to read and write data more quickly. Using the built-in data compression capability, the 3590 has a potential maximum throughput of 20 MB per second. Actual throughput is a function of end-to-end system capabilities including processor, DASD, bus, IOP, OS/400 blocking and data compaction.

The 3590 uses new read/write and media technology for vastly increased capacity and reliability. The new cartridge has an uncompacted data capacity of 10 GB, or typically over 30 GB assuming a 3:1 compaction ratio. The capacity of an individual drive has further been increased by the addition of the Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF), which allows an operator to mount ten cartridges at a time via a magazine. Thus an individual drive can provide storage for 100 to 300 GB of data. The 3590 cannot read or write 3490E tape cartridges.

The 3590 is available in two models. The Model B11 is rack mounted and includes a 10-cartridge Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF) that can be used in random access mode as a mini-library. The Model B1A does not include the ACF and is designed to fit into the 3494 Tape Library Dataserver, increasing total library capacity to over 90 terabytes.

The 3590 attaches to all AS/400 DXX and later models, except the X02 and P03 models, using AS/400 Feature #6501 (Magnetic Media Subsystem Controller). Each feature #6501 can support up to two tape drives. The 3490 has two SCSI ports and can be shared between two systems.

Backup Recovery and Media Services/400 (BRMS/400) is recommended to support automation in tape handling, media management, fast search, and automatic migration of data between tape and DASD based on user defined policies. For developing unique applications, OS/400 provides a command interface.

7208 8mm External Tape Drives

The 7208 is an 8mm helical scan, medium performance, high capacity, streaming tape drive with models supporting media capacity of up to 7.0GB per cartridge. The Model 2 (Withdrawn from marketing) provides 2.3GB capacity. When hardware data compression (HDC) on the IOP is enabled, it typically provides 1.5 times improvement in capacity and transfer rate. The 7208 Model 12 provides 5GB capacity and the Model 222 provides 7GB. Both Models 12 and 222 support an implementation of IBM's Improved Data Recording Capability (IDRC) that typically provides a two times improvement in capacity and transfer rate.

Both 7208 models are stand-alone, table-top devices, and can be used for save/restore, alternate IPL, program interchange and 8mm cartridge tape interchange with other AS/400 systems. Kits for rack-mounting are available via RPQ 841997 for the Model 2 and RPQ 841998 for the Model 12. The 7208 attaches to the AS/400 via Removable Media Device Attachment Feature (#2621). This feature supports up to two tape devices.

Full interchange of data is supported between Models 002, 012 and 222, the 9427 and the AS/400 Advanced Series internal 7GB 8mm tape units, using the proper tape density and 7208-002/012/222 tape media. All models use the same media and cleaning cartridges. The Models 002, 012 and 222 do NOT support data interchange with the 7208 Model 1 or Model 11 attached to RS/6000 systems.

The Model 2 has an instantaneous data transfer rate of 245KBps second. When HDC is enabled the unattended save rate would typically be 1GB/Hr with 3.5GB of data stored per cartridge. The Model 12 has an instantaneous data transfer rate of 500KBps. When IDRC is enabled the unattended save rate would typically be 3GB/Hr with 10GB of data stored per cartridge. The Model 222 has a sustained data transfer rate of 500KBps. Using IDRC, maximum effective data transfer rate is up to 1MBps, and capacity is up to 14GB of data stored per cartridge, depending on the type of data.

Attaches to all AS/400 Advanced Series models. Model 222 requires the support of OS/400 Version 3 Release 1. Maximums: See System Unit Summary table.

9347 Tape Unit (Withdrawn)

The 9347 is a rack-mounted, auto-loading, 1/2-inch reel-to-reel streaming tape drive. It is provided for save/restore, alternate IPL, program distribution, and 1/2-inch reel tape interchange.

The 9347 is a dual density 1600/3200bpi drive with an instantaneous data rate of 160KB per second at 1600bpi.

The 9347 attaches to the 9406 via the Magnetic Storage Device Controller (#6112). The 9347 must be installed in one of the following rack enclosures:

·                     9406 System Unit Expansion (#5042)

·                     9406 Bus Extension Unit (#5040)

·                     I/O Expansion Rack (9309 #9129)

·                     General Purpose Expansion Rack (9309 #9141)

·                     General Purpose I/O Rack (9309 #9171)

·                     9332 Disk Unit Rack (9309 #9177 and #9277)

The 9347 Tape drive supports 1.5 mil thick tape media up to a maximum of 2400 feet. Maximum: See Magnetic Tape Configuration Table.

9348 Model 1 Magnetic Tape Unit

The 9348 Model 1 is a rack mounted, streaming 1/2-inch reel-to-reel tape drive. It is provided for save/restore, alternate IPL, program distribution, and 1/2-inch reel tape interchange.

The 9348 is a dual density 1600/6250bpi drive with an instantaneous data rate of 200KB per second at 1600bpi and 781KB per second at 6250bpi.

The 9348 Model 1 attaches to the 9406 system models via the Removable Media Device Attachment Feature (#2621). The 9348 must be installed in one of the following rack enclosures:

·                     9406 System Unit

·                     9406 System Unit Expansion (#5042)

·                     9406 Bus Extension Unit (#5040)

·                     I/O Expansion Rack (9309 #9129)

·                     General Purpose Expansion Rack (9309 #9141)

·                     General Purpose I/O Rack (9309 #9171)

·                     9332 Disk Unit Rack (9309 #9177 and #9277)

The 9348 Tape drive supports 1.5 mil thick tape media up to a maximum of 2400 feet. The 9248 Model 1 Magnetic Tape Unit includes an attachment cable and terminator. Maximum: See Magnetic Tape Configuration Table.

9427 8mm Tape Cartridge Library Models 210 and 211

The 9427 Models 210 and 211 are automated tape libraries supported on all AS/400 D, E and F models (except Models D02 and E02), and on all AS/400 Advanced Series models. The 9427-210 is a stand-alone unit, and the 9427-211 is rack-mount unit that requires 14 EIA units and 1/2 of the horizontal rack space. Two Model 211 units can be placed in a rack, side-by-side. Each 9427 supports one or two 7GB 8mm tape drives. Up to twenty tape cartridges are supported. Optional features to support dual host channels, tape mirroring for fault tolerance, off-line host independent functions (tape copy and compare), and a label printer port will be available. Device performance is 1.5MB/sec. The 9427 is available in black or white.

Tape cartridge capacity is 7GB and sustained data transfer rate is 500KBps. Using Improved Data Recording Capability (IDRC), maximum tape cartridge capacity is up to 14GB, and effective data transfer rate is up to 1MBps, depending on the type of data. Total 9427 capacity is up to 280GB.

The 9427 can be used for save/restore, alternate IPL (except on Models D04, D06, D10 and D20), program distribution, migration, data interchange, automatic migration of data between DASD and tape, and mass storage for data archive. Full interchange of data is supported with the 7208-002, 7208-012 and 7208-232 tape drives, and the AS/400 Advanced Series internal 7GB 8mm tape units, using the proper tape density and 7208-002/012 tape media.

Media is handled in two, ten-cartridge magazines, which can easily be added to or removed from the tape library. Each library has a bar-code reader used to inventory the library contents, and a display on the front panel that is used for status and error codes. Keys located next to the display are used for selecting operating options. The 9427 has a front door of clear plastic so that the robotics, drives and cartridge tapes can be seen while in operation. The door has a key-lock for security.

Neither the 7GB 8mm Cartridge Tape unit located in the AS/400 system unit, nor the 7208-222, can be migrated to a 9427.

The 9427 is attached via the Removable Media Device Attachment (#2621), with a maximum of one 9427 per #2621. The Removable Media Device Attachment (#2621) has two SCSI ports. The 9427 can attach to the #2621 using one or two ports (two ports are required for maximum performance of the 9427). If the 9427 is attached using only one SCSI port, then the other SCSI port can be used to attach other devices. A feature is available to support attachment to two systems with random access to cartridges, tape mirroring, offline tape copy and compare, and a label printer port.

Support for the 9427 is provided by OS/400 Version 3 Release 1. Backup, Recovery and Media Services/400 (5763-BR1) is recommended to support automation in tape handling, media management, and automatic migration of data between tape and DASD based on user defined policies. For those developing unique library applications, OS/400 provides a library command interface.

Magnetic Tape Configuration Table for 9406 Models

Machine Type/
 Feature    D35/E35 D45/E45 D50/E50 D60/E60 D70/E70 D80/E80 E90/E95 GROUP
              F35     F45     F50     F60     F70     F80   F90-F97
--------     ----    ----    ----    ----    ----    ----     ----  -----
#6366        0-1     0-1     0-1     0-1     0-1     0-1     0-1
#6368        0-5     0-5     0-9     0-9     0-9     0-9     0-9
9347         0-2     0-2     0-2     0-2     0-2     0-2     0-2
7208         0-2     0-2     0-4     0-4     0-4     0-4     0-4
9348         0-2     0-2     0-4     0-4     0-4     0-4     0-4    A
2440 A12     0-2     0-2     0-4     0-4     0-4     0-4     0-4    A
             ---     ---     ---     ---     ---     ---     ---  -----
Maximum       2       2       4       4       4       4       4
 Group A tape
 devices per
 system
3422 A0      0-2    0-2     0-4     0-4      0-4     0-4     0-4    B
3430 A01     0-2    0-2     0-4     0-4      0-4     0-4     0-4    B
3480
 A11/A22     0-2    0-2     0-4     0-4      0-4     0-4     0-4    B
3490
 A01/A02     0-2    0-2     0-4     0-4      0-4     0-4     0-4    B
3490
 A31/D32     0-2    0-2     0-4     0-4      0-4     0-4     0-4    B
3490E
 A10/A20     0-2    0-2     0-4     0-4      0-4     0-4     0-4    B
3490E
 C10/C11/C22 0-2    0-2     0-4     0-4      0-4     0-4     0-4    B
3490E
 D41/D42     0-2    0-2     0-4     0-4      0-4     0-4     0-4    B
9427         0-2    0-2     0-4     0-4      0-4     0-4     0-4    B
             ---     ---     ---     ---     ---     ---     ---  -----
Maximum       2       2       4       4       4       4       4
 Group B control
 units per
 system

Notes:

·                     Performance information will be available on HONE INFOSYSTEM.

·                     Group B control units may attach multiple drives. See the description for the particular tape unit for maximum drives per controller.

·                     The "total" number of magnetic tape devices that can be attached to the 9406 is the sum of feature #6366, #6368, 9347, 7208, total of group A, and total of group B times the number of drives per group B controller.

Optical Library Dataserver

3995 Optical Library Dataserver

The 3995 Optical Library Dataserver Models C40, C42, C44, C46 and C48, with direct attach capability, add a new level of price, capacity and performance to the existing storage hierarchy of magnetic disk, optical, and tape. The new models support 52GB, 135GB, 278GB, 405GB or 670GB of storage using the industry-standard 2.6GB multifunction optical drive. Model C44 can be upgraded to a model C46.

The new LAN-attached Models C20, C22, C24, C26, and C28 support 52GB, 135GB, 278GB, 405GB, and 670GB of storage using the 2.6GB multifunction optical drive.

The 2.6GB drive has two-times the capacity of existing drives and supports both rewritable and WORM optical disks. This new drive also improves data transfer rate and reliability over the existing 1.3GB optical drives.

These new 3995 models are ideally suited for enabling applications to bring data currently stored on paper, microfiche, or microfilm on-line. You can also use the 3995 as a low-cost complement to high-performance magnetic disk to extend the online life of your data. The new libraries will automate optical disk handling using the latest technology with improvements in disk exchange time and reliability. The following OS/400 support is required:

·                     For direct attached models (C40/C42/C44/C46/C48)

o                                            OS/400 V3R2 with PRPQ 5799-XBW S/C 3520, and 5755-AS3 with feature #1979

·                     For LAN attached models (C20/C22/C24/C26/C28)

o                                            OS/400 V3R1 with PRPQ 5799-XBW and S/C 3510

o                                            OS/400 V3R2 with PRPQ 5799-XBW and S/C 3520

4754 Security Interface Unit (SIU)

The 4754 Security Interface Unit (SIU) is an optional device that attaches to the Cryptographic Processor features #2620 or #2628. The 4754 provides the ability to communicate with the IBM Personal Security Card for highly secure importation of cryptographic keys into the Cryptographic Processor. The 4754 may also be used for initialization of the Cryptographic Processor. The 4754 SIU has tamper-resistant packaging. Three IBM Personal Security Cards are included with each 4754. The 4754 must be ordered separately from the Cryptographic Processor feature.

Software support for the 4754 is provided by OS/400 Version 2 Release 3 or later, and the IBM Common Cryptographic Architecture Security Services/400 PRPQ (P84224 (5799-FBR)).

Remote Workstation Controllers

5251 Model 12

The 5251 Model 12 may be used to attach remote workstations. It is a workstation controller and communications unit for remote attachment of multiple display stations and printers. PC Support access by Personal Computers and Personal System/2s attached to the 5251 Model 12 will not be supported.

Note: Remote workstation controllers attach to the AS/400 via the communications subsystem features. The 5294 or the 5394 running in 5294 emulation mode, will not give IBM Personal Computers or Personal System/2s access to IBM PC Support/400.

5294

The 5294 Remote Control Unit can be used to attach up to eight 5250 type displays, printers, IBM Personal Computers and Personal System/2s, and Personal System/55 (AP only), to an AS/400 via a communications link. The function provided will be equivalent to that available on the System/36 and System/38 with the exception that PC Support access by Personal Computers and Personal System/2s attached to the 5294 will not be supported.

5394

The 5394 Remote Control Unit attaches up to sixteen 5250 type displays, printers, IBM Personal Computers and Personal System/2s, and Personal System/55 (AP only) to an AS/400 via a communications link. The function provided will be similar to that provided to the local workstations via the #6140 or #6040 local twinaxial workstation controllers.

5494 Remote Control Unit

The 5494 Remote Control Unit manages the operation of workstations and workstation communications to the AS/400. The IBM 5494-EXT replaces the IBM 5494-001 and the IBM 5494-002. The 5494 now has only one model, to which features are added customizing the 5494 for operational needs.

The 5494-EXT supports the attachment of up to 28 twinaxial devices. With the 5494 Twinaxial Expansion Kit installed, up to 56 twinaxial devices can communicate to the AS/400 through a Type 2.1 connection.

By installing the 5494 Token-Ring Adapter, the 5494-EXT has all the functional capabilities of the withdrawn 5494-002. It can communicate with an AS/400 system over a Token-Ring network while supporting up to 28 twinaxial devices, or can support Token-Ring attached devices while communicating with an AS/400 over an SDLC, X.21, or X.25 connection. In this configuration, the 5494 supports up to 80 devices of which up to 28 could be twinaxial attached and the rest Token-Ring attached.

The Ethernet Adapter supports IEEE 802.2 logical link control and IEEE 802.3 or DIX Version 2.0 frame format using a 10BASE2 (BNC), a 10BASE5 (15-pin D-SUB), or a 10BASE-T (RJ-45) connector. The 5494 Ethernet AUI Cable allows the attachment to an Ethernet Network using thick coaxial (10BASE5) cabling. Ethernet support allows the 5494 to be used as a gateway to an Ethernet LAN or attach to an AS/400 System via an Ethernet Network.

The 5494 Utility Program allows the selection of Concurrent Diagnostics, configuration information, or to reset and restart the 5494 Remote Control Unit from a remote Programmable Workstation (PWS). The PWS no longer needs to be directly attached to a 5494 to provide access to remote 5494's from a central site.

The IBM 5494 Release 3.0 microcode supports all the functions of the IBM 5494 Release 2.0 microcode and the following enhancements:

·                     Support of OS/400 Version 3 Release 1.

·                     Support for AS/400 automatic configuration of Non-programmable Workstations (NWS) and printers attached to the 5494. The 5494 Remote Control Unit description can also be automatically created. (This function requires OS/400 V3R1 be installed on the AS/400)

·                     Attachment capability to a SNA subarea network.

·                     Eighty (80) device support is now standard for Token-Ring and Ethernet attached devices.

Multiconnectors

5299 Multiconnector and TTPA Adapter

The 5299 Multiconnector and Twinaxial to Telephone Twisted Pair Adapter (TTPA) may be used with appropriate telephone wiring. Initial and ongoing site cabling costs may be reduced with this wiring option.

Workstation Support

Twinaxial Displays

The following displays are supported by the Twinaxial Workstation Controller (#6140, #6040, and #6050):

·                     3179 - 2

·                     3180 - 2

·                     3196

·                     3197

·                     3476

·                     3477

·                     3486

·                     3487

·                     3488

·                     3489

·                     5251 - 011, 999

·                     5291

·                     5292 - 1, 2

ASCII Displays

The following ASCII displays, are supported by the ASCII Workstation Controller (#6141 and #6041):

·                     3101-23 - Display Terminal

·                     3151 - ASCII Display Terminal

·                     3161 - ASCII Display Terminal

·                     3162 - ASCII Display Terminal

·                     3163 - ASCII Display Terminal

·                     3164 - Color ASCII Display Terminal

The 3151, 316X, or equivalent attached to the ASCII Workstation Controller are supported as the AS/400 system console. See the "ASCII Workstation Reference and Example" manual SA41-9922, for specific configuration information.

The following non-IBM displays have been tested and found to work with the ASCII Workstation Controller:

·                     TeleVideo 910, 925, 955 (2)

·                     DEC VT-100, VT-220 (3)

·                     Wyse WY30, WY50, WY60 (4)

·                     Data General DASHER D 220 (5)

LAN Attached Displays

6250 X Terminal Family

The IBM 6250 X Terminal offers high-performance, local-area network (LAN)-attached X terminals that provide a low-cost, desk-top platform for connectivity to the AS/400 and UNIX based host platforms (such as the RS/6000*). The 6250 X Terminal supports multiple 5250 emulation sessions to one or more AS/400s using an X Windows interface. The X terminal can also access UNIX host applications using either the memory efficient 6250 Window manger or the industry standard Motif** Window Manager. Either window manager provides a superb graphics platform for applications in the X Window environment.

The 6250 X Terminal Family includes four models...color and monochrome Ethernet models and color and monochrome Token-Ring models. They come with a base of 4MB of memory, expandable to 20MB or 16MB, depending on the model. The displays both have a resolution of 1024X768 and the color models support 256 colors.

The 6250 X Terminal requires one AS/400 on the LAN to have the IBM 6250 X Terminal Program for OS/400 (PRPQ 5799-QGP) installed. The X terminal down-loads the X window environment from the AS/400 and then can communicate with other hosts on the LAN.

The X terminals include an integrated, swivel display, keyboard, three button mouse and license to use the 6250 program. The X terminals have an easy to use setup menu for initial configuration and standard LAN connectors for the most popular Ethernet or Token-Ring connections.

IBM Personal Computer Support

The AS/400 supports the IBM Personal Computer, Models 5150, 5160, 5162 and 5170, as described in programming announcement letters dated February 3, 1987 and January 26, 1988.

Personal System/2 Support

The AS/400 supports the IBM Personal System/2 models and the IBM Personal Typing System. For information regarding attachment of specific Personal System/2 models refer to the model Sales Manual description under "List of Supported Products" for AS/400 attachment hardware and under "IBM Software Compatibility" for supported AS/400 software.

The IBM Personal Computer and the Personal System/2, when attached to the Twinaxial Workstation Controller, are supported for use as a system console and specific IBM Personal Computer printers are supported as system printers.

Printer Support

Twinaxial Printers

The following printers are supported by the Twinaxial Workstation Controller. Those which are DBCS (Double Byte Character Set) font capable are listed in the subsequent section.

Laser Printers
(Includes all electrophotographic print technologies)
 
Device            Max.
 Type  Model     Speed   Datastream      Forms
------ -----    -------  ----------     --------
 3812   001*    12 ppm    SCS,IPDS        Cut
        002*    12 ppm    SCS,IPDS        Cut
 3816   01S*    16 ppm    SCS,IPDS        Cut
        01D*    16 ppm    SCS,IPDS        Cut
 3912   AS0     12 ppm    SCS             Cut
        AS1     12 ppm    SCS,IPDS        Cut
 3916   AS0     16 ppm    SCS             Cut
        AS1     16 ppm    SCS,IPDS        Cut
 3930   02S     30 ppm        IPDS        Cut
        02D     30 ppm        IPDS        Cut
 3935   001     35 ppm        IPDS        Cut
 4028   AS1     10 ppm        IPDS        Cut

* Withdrawn from marketing

Impact Printers
 
Device            Max.
 Type  Model     Speed   Datastream   Forms
------ -----    -------  ----------  --------
 4210   001*    200 cps   SCS        Cont
 4214   002*    200 cps   SCS        Cont
 4224   101     200 cps       IPDS   Cont
        102     400 cps       IPDS   Cont
        1C2     400 cps       IPDS   Cont
        1E2     400 cps       IPDS   Cont
        1E3     600 cps       IPDS   Cont
 4230   101     375 cps   SCS        Cont/Cut
        1S2     480 cps   SCS        Cont/Cut
        4S3     600 cps   SCS        Cont/Cut
        1I1     375 cps       IPDS   Cont/Cut
        102     480 cps       IPDS   Cont/Cut
        4I3     600 cps       IPDS   Cont/Cut
 4234   002*    410 lpm   SCS        Cont
        008*    410 lpm       IPDS   Cont
        012*    800 lpm       IPDS   Cont
 4245   T12*   1200 lpm   SCS        Cont
        T20*   2000 lpm   SCS        Cont
 5219   D01*     40 cps   SCS        Cont/Cut
        D02*     60 cps   SCS        Cont/Cut
 5224   001*    140 lpm   SCS        Cont
        002*    240 lpm   SCS        Cont
 5225   001*    280 lpm   SCS        Cont
        002*    400 lpm   SCS        Cont
        003*    490 lpm   SCS        Cont
        004*    560 lpm   SCS        Cont
 5256   001*     40 cps   SCS        Cont
        002*     80 cps   SCS        Cont
        003*    120 cps   SCS        Cont
 5262   001*    650 lpm   SCS        Cont
 6252   T08     800 lpm   SCS        Cont
        T12    1200 lpm   SCS        Cont
 6262   T12    1200 lpm   SCS        Cont
        T14    1400 lpm   SCS        Cont
        T22    2200 lpm   SCS        Cont
 6400   004     475 lpm   SCS,IPDS   Cont
 6400   008     800 lpm   SCS,IPDS   Cont
 6400   012     800 lpm   SCS,IPDS   Cont
 6408   CT0     800 lpm   SCS        Cont
        CTA     800 lpm   SCS,IPDS   Cont
 6412   CT0    1200 lpm   SCS        Cont
        CTA    1200 lpm   SCS,IPDS   Cont

* Withdrawn from marketing

Key to Abbreviations:

·                     Maximum Speed

cps

characters per second

lpm

lines per minute

ppm

·                     Datastream

SCS

SNA Character Set

IPDS

Intelligent Printer Data Stream

·                     Forms

Cut

Cut-sheet forms

Cont

Continuous forms

DBCS Printers

The following printers support DBCS (Double Byte Character Set) fonts:

Twinaxial Attached

·                     3930 - 02S, 02D (DBCS option required)

IBM Personal Printers

The following IBM Personal Printers are supported by the attachments indicated in the following table. Refer to "Attaching IBM Personal Printers to IBM Systems" (S544-4209) for attachment information. Also refer to the specific emulator product documentation for attachment information.

                            Device              Attachment
        Printer              Type   Model          Keys
        -------             ------  -----   -------------------
 IBM Personal Series II/Plus 2380     -    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12
 IBM Personal Series II/Plus 2381     -    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12
 IBM Personal Series II/Plus 2390     -    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12
 IBM Personal Series II/Plus 2391     -    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12
 IBM 3812 Pageprinter        3812     1    2 3 6 7 12
 IBM 3812 Pageprinter        3812     2    2 3 6 7 12
 IBM 3816 Pageprinter        3816    01S   2 3
 IBM 3816 Pageprinter        3816    01D   2 3
 IBM 3912 Page Printer       3912    AS0   2 3 4 7 12
 IBM 3912 Page Printer       3912    AS1   2 3 4 7 12
 IBM 3916 Page Printer       3916    AS0   2 3 4 7 12
 IBM 3916 Page Printer       3916    AS1   2 3 4 7 12
 IBM 3930 Printer            3930    03S   1 2 3 12
 IBM 3930 Printer            3930    03D   1 2 3 12
 IBM LaserPrinter            4019     1    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12
 IBM LaserPrinter E          4019    E01   1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12
 IBM LaserPrinter 5E         4029    10    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12
 IBM LaserPrinter 6          4029    20    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12
 IBM LaserPrinter 10         4029    30    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12
 IBM LaserPrinter 10E        4029    40    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12
 IBM 4037 5E Printer         4037     -    1 2 3 4 7 10 11 12
 IBM LaserPrinter            4039    10R   2 3 4 7 12
 IBM LaserPrinter            4039    12R   2 3 4 7 12
 IBM LaserPrinter            4039    12L   2 3 4 7 12
 IBM LaserPrinter            4039    16L   2 3 4 7 12
 IBM 4070 Printer            4070     -    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12
 IBM ExecJet                 4072     -    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12
 IBM ExecJet II              4076     -    1 2 3 4 7 10 11 12
 IBM Proprinter              4201     1    2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
 IBM Proprinter II           4201     2    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
 IBM Proprinter III          4201     3    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
 IBM Proprinter XL           4202     1    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
 IBM Proprinter II XL        4202     2    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
 IBM Proprinter III XL       4202     3    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
 IBM Proprinter X24          4207     1    1 2 3 6 7 8 9 12
 IBM Proprinter X24E         4207     2    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
 IBM Proprinter XL24         4208     1    1 2 3 6 7 8 9 12
 IBM Proprinter XL24E        4208     2    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
 IBM Proprinter 24P          4212     -    2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12
 IBM Personal Pageprinter    4216    10    1 2 3 4 5 6 12
 IBM 4224 Printer            4224    301   1 12
 IBM 4224 Printer            4224    302   1 12
 IBM 4224 Printer            4224    3E3   1 12
 IBM 4226 Printer            4226    302   1 2 3 4 5 6 7 12
 IBM 4230 Printer            4232    4S3   1 2 3 4 5 12
 IBM 4230 Printer            4232    4I3   1 2 3 4 5 12
 IBM 4232 Printer            4232    302   1 2 3 4 5 12
 IBM 4234 Printer            4234     9    1 12
 IBM 4234 Printer            4234    13    1 12
 IBM 4770 Ink Jet Printer    4770     -    12
 IBM Quietwriter             5201     1    2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12
 IBM Quietwriter             5201     2    2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
 IBM Quietwriter III         5202     -    2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
 IBM Quickwriter             5204     -    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
 IBM Serial Matrix Printer   4247    A00
 IBM Impactwriter            6252    AS8   1 9 12
 IBM Impactwriter            6252    AS2   1 9 12
 IBM 6400 Printer            6400    004   1 2 3 12
 IBM 6400 Printer            6400    008   1 2 3 12
 IBM 6400 Printer            6400    012   1 2 3 12
 IBM 6408 Printer            6408    A00   1 2 3 12
 IBM 6408 Printer            6408    CTA   1 2 3 12
 IBM 6412 Printer            6412    A00   1 2 3 12
 IBM 6412 Printer            6412    CTA   1 2 3 12

Attachment Keys:

1.                  Attachment via the AS/400 ASCII Workstation Controller

2.                  Attachment via a PC or PS/2 utilizing AS/400 PC Support Workstation Function (DOS)

3.                  Attachment via a PC or PS/2 utilizing IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.3, or later

4.                  Attachment via the 3477 InfoWindow display or 3486/3487/3488 InfoWindow II displays

5.                  Attachment via the 3197 Display station

6.                  Attachment via a PS/2 utilizing the S36/38 Workstation Emulation Program

7.                  Attachment via a PC or PS/2 utilizing the Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program

8.                  Attachment via a PC or PS/2 utilizing the Remote 5250 Emulation Program

9.                  Attachment via the 5208 Model 1 ASCII-5250 Link Protocol Converter

10.              Attachment via Rumba/400

11.              Attachment via IBM OS/2 Communications Manager/2

12.              Attachment via OS/400 Host Print Transform function

Non-IBM Personal Printers

The following Non-IBM Personal Printers are supported by the attachments indicated in the following table. Refer to "Attaching IBM Personal Printers to IBM Systems" (S544-4209) for attachment information. Also refer to the specific emulator product documentation for attachment information.

                                          Attachment
        Printer                              Keys
        -------                           ----------
 COMPAQ PageMark 15                        2 12
 COMPAQ PageMark 20                        2 12
 HP DeskJet 500                            2 12
 HP DeskJet 520                            12
 HP DeskJet 550C                           2 12
 HP DeskJet 560C                           12
 HP LaserJet Series II                     2 12
 HP LaserJet IID                           2 12
 HP LaserJet IIP                           2 12
 HP LaserJet III                           2 12
 HP LaserJet IIID                          2 12
 HP LaserJet IIIP                          2 12
 HP LaserJet IIISi                         2 12
 HP LaserJet 4                             12
 HP PaintJet                               12
 HP PaintJet XL                            12
 HP PaintJet XL300                         12
 Epson ActionPrinter 2250                  2 12
 Epson ActionPrinter 3250                  2 12
 Epson ActionPrinter 5000                  2 12
 Epson ActionPrinter 5500                  2 12
 Epson DFX-5000                            2 12
 Epson DFX-8000                            2 12
 Epson EPL-7000                            2 12
 Epson EPL-8000                            2 12
 Epson FX-850                              2 12
 Epson FX-870                              2 12
 Epson FX-1170                             2 12
 Epson LQ-510                              2 12
 Epson LQ-570                              2 12
 Epson LQ-860                              2 12
 Epson LQ-870                              2 12
 Epson LQ-1070                             2 12
 Epson LQ-1170                             2 12
 Epson LQ-2550                             2 12
 Epson LX-810                              2 12
 Epson SQ-870                              2 12
 Epson SQ-1170                             2 12
 NEC P2 Pinwriter                          2 12
 NEC P2200 Pinwriter                       2 12
 NEC P2200 XE Pinwriter                    2 12
 NEC P5200 Pinwriter                       2 12
 NEC P5300 Pinwriter                       2 12
 NEC P6200 Pinwriter                       2 12
 NEC P6300 Pinwriter                       2 12
 Okidata Microline 184 Turbo               2 12
 Okidata Microline 320                     2 12
 Okidata Microline 321                     2 12
 Okidata Microline 390 Plus                2 12
 Okidata Microline 391 Plus                2 12
 Okidata Microline 393 Plus                2 12
 Okidata Microline 590                     2 12
 Okidata Microline 591                     2 12
 Okidata OL400 LED Page Printer            2 12
 Okidata OL800 LED Page Printer            2 12
 Okidata OL810 LED Page Printer            2 12
 Okidata OL820 LED Page Printer            2 12
 Okidata Pacemark 3410                     2 12
 Panasonic KX-P1123                        2 12
 Panasonic KX-P1124                        2 12
 Panasonic KX-P1124i                       2 12
 Panasonic KX-P1180                        2 12
 Panasonic KX-P1180i                       2 12
 Panasonic KX-P1191                        2 12
 Panasonic KX-P1624                        2 12
 Panasonic KX-P1654                        2 12
 Panasonic KX-P1695                        2 12
 Panasonic KX-P2123                        2 12
 Panasonic KX-P2124                        2 12
 Panasonic KX-P2180                        2 12
 Panasonic KX-P2624                        2 12
 Panasonic KX-P4410                        2 12
 Panasonic KX-P4420                        2 12
 Panasonic KX-P4430                        2 12
 Panasonic KX-P4450i                       2 12
 Panasonic KX-P4451                        2 12
 Xerox 4215/MRP                            12
 Xerox 4219/MRP                            12
 Xerox 4220/MRP                            12
 Xerox 4235 Laser Printer                  12
 Xerox 4700 II Color Document Printer      12

Attachment Keys:

1.                  Attachment via the AS/400 ASCII Workstation Controller

2.                  Attachment via a PC or PS/2 utilizing AS/400 PC Support Workstation Function (DOS)

3.                  Attachment via a PC or PS/2 utilizing IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.3, or later

4.                  Attachment via the 3477 InfoWindow display or 3486/3487/3488 InfoWindow II displays

5.                  Attachment via the 3197 Display station

6.                  Attachment via a PS/2 utilizing the S36/38 Workstation Emulation Program

7.                  Attachment via a PC or PS/2 utilizing the Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program

8.                  Attachment via a PC or PS/2 utilizing the Remote 5250 Emulation Program

9.                  Attachment via the 5208 Model 1 ASCII-5250 Link Protocol Converter

10.              Attachment via Rumba/400

11.              Attachment via IBM OS/2 Communications Manager/2

12.              Attachment via OS/400 Host Print Transform function

LAN-attached ASCII Printers

IBM and non-IBM ASCII printers can be attached directly to the AS/400 via a LAN connection using the IBM 4033 LAN connection product. Ethernet and Token-ring connections are supported. The ASCII printers that are supported thru this attachment method are the same printers supported using the OS/400 Host Print Transform function. Refer to the previous charts for a list of IBM and non-IBM ASCII printers supported with the Host Print Transform function.

The IBM 4039 LaserPrinter can also be attached directly to the AS/400 via a LAN network connection using the 4039 integrated network adapter option.

LAN-attached IPDS Printers

The following AFP-capable IBM Page Printers are supported on Token-Ring and SDLC as specified. The Print Services Facility/400 (PSF/400) feature of OS/400 Version 3 Release 1 is required for the attachment of these printers.

  Device
  Type      Model   Speed    Attachment
  ------    -----   -----    ----------
  3935         1    35PPM   Token-Ring, SDLC

The following IBM Page Printers are supported on Token-Ring (using Remote Print Manager or PSF/2 Version 1.10 or later) and SDLC as specified:

  Device
  Type      Model   Speed    Attachment
  ------    -----   -----    ----------
  3820         1*   20PPM    Token-Ring, SDLC
  3825         1    58PPM    Token-Ring
  3827         1    92PPM    Token-Ring
  3828         1    92PPM    Token-Ring
  3829         1    91PPM    Token-Ring
  3835         1    88PPM    Token-Ring
  3835         2    91PPM    Token-Ring
  3900         1   229PPM    Token-Ring
  3900       DUP   300PPM    Token-Ring

* Withdrawn from marketing

Ordering Information

The following products are required for printer attachment using Remote Print Manager or PSF/2 Version 1.1 or later.

Hardware

1.                  PS/2 or IBM PC AT

2.                       IBM Personal System/2* Model 30-021 or Model 30-E21
3.                       Memory           640KB
4.                       Storage          IBM 20MB Fixed Disk
5.                       Diskette Drive   One double-sided 3 1/2 inch 720KB
6.                       Keyboard         Enhanced Personal Computer Keyboard
7.                       Display          Monochrome or color display (80 column)
8.                       or
9.                       IBM Personal Computer AT*
10.                   Memory           640KB
11.                   Storage          IBM 20MB Fixed Disk
12.                   Diskette Drive   One high-density 5 1/4 inch 1.2MB
13.                   Keyboard         Either an Enhanced Personal Computer Keyboard
14.                                     or a Personal Computer AT Keyboard
15.                   Display          Monochrome or color display (80 column)

16.              IBM 4Mbps Token-Ring Network Subsystem Feature or IBM 16/4Mbps Token-Ring Network Subsystem Feature

17.              8228 Multistation Access Unit

18.              Token-Ring PC Cable (#3390 for machine 8530)

19.              Token-Ring PC Network Adapter II (#9858 for machine 8530)

20.              IBM S/370 Channel Emulator Card and Cable (#3200 for machine 8530)

21.              IBM S/370 Channel Terminators: Bus, P/N 2282675; Tag, P/N 2282676

22.              The IBM 3820 Printer requires the 3820 S/370 Interface Attachment (#3055)

Software

1.                  DOS Version 3.3 or subsequent releases

2.                  IBM Personal Computer APPC/PC, Version 1.11 (Program #75X1047), with most current PTFs applied or subsequent releases

3.                  Token-Ring Network PC Adapter Support Interface (provided on the Network PC Adapter II card), or Local Area Network Support Program V1.1 (Program #93X5683)

4.                  Remote PrintManager Version 2.0.3 (Program #25F5944)

Miscellaneous Devices

2480 AS/400 Wireless Access Point

These compact, lightweight devices act as either wireless LAN bridges or wireless LAN repeaters which support transparent roaming through a multi-cell network. Two models of the AS/400 Wireless Access Point are supported:

·                     2480 Model RS0, AS/400 Wireless RS-485 LAN Access Point. This device is used with the AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter to create a multi-cell wireless network. These access points may connect to the AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter through an RS-485 twisted-pair wired backbone or wirelessly using the RF network. The 2480 Model RS0 is supported on AS/400 Advanced Systems with an AS/400 Wireless LAN Adapter (#2668)

·                     2480 Model E00, AS/400 Wireless Ethernet LAN Access Point. This device serves as a bridge from an Ethernet 10Base2, 10Base5 or 10Base/T wired LAN to the AS/400 Wireless LAN network. Multiple units can be used to create a multi-cell network. The 2480 Model E00 is supported on AS/400 Advanced Systems with an Ethernet adapter.

4754 Security Interface Unit (SIU)

The 4754 Security Interface Unit (SIU) is an optional device that attaches to the Cryptographic Processor features #2620 or #2628. The 4754 provides the ability to communicate with the IBM Personal Security Card for highly secure importation of cryptographic keys into the Cryptographic Processor. The 4754 may also be used for initialization of the Cryptographic Processor. The 4754 SIU has tamper-resistant packaging. Three IBM Personal Security Cards are included with each 4754. The 4754 must be ordered separately from the Cryptographic Processor feature.

Software support for the 4754 is provided by OS/400 Version 3 Release 1 or later, and the IBM Common Cryptographic Architecture Security Services/400 PRPQ (5799-XBY).

5159 Programmable I/O Controller

The 5159 Programmable I/O Controller is an asynchronous communication controller that performs computer processing and data transfer between an AS/400 and downstream asynchronous devices. These devices include but are not limited to time clocks, scales, badge readers, scanners, robots, bar code readers. The 5159 attaches locally to any AS/400 communication port configured for asynchronous communications. The asynchronous devices may attach locally or remotely under the control of user programs. Remote devices may require the use of asynchronous modems to connect to the 5159.

5259 Migration Data Link (Withdrawn from Marketing)

The 5259 Migration Data Link is a stand-alone device that offers a cabled data path between the IBM System/36 or System/38 and the IBM AS/400 system. Systems are connected through their respective workstation controllers.

The Migration Data Link, together with programming support provided by the IBM AS/400 System/36 Migration Aid (5727-MG1) or the IBM AS/400 System/38 Migration Aid (5714-MG1) and the IBM Operating System/400 Version 3 Release 0.5 or later, provides for data send/receive functions between systems. In addition, the Migration Data Link provides access between systems by providing hot key availability from up to seven workstations per Migration Data Link.

System/36 and System/38 Devices Not Supported by the AS/400

·                     1255 MICR

·                     3203 Printer

·                     3262 Printer

·                     3370 DASD

·                     3410/3411 Tape Units

·                     4245 - 012, 020 (Note 1)

·                     5211 Printer

·                     5224-012 Printer (Japan only)

·                     5225-011, 012 Printer (Japan only)

·                     5251-001, 002 Display

·                     5251-012 Display/WS Controller (AS/400 Office and PC support only)

·                     5252 Display

·                     5255 Display (Japan only)

·                     5424 MFCU

·                     6157 Cartridge Tape Unit

·                     62PC Disk Drive

·                     6580 Displaywriter as a printer device

·                     6670 Document Processor

·                     8809 Tape Drive

·                     Digital Data Service Adapter (DDSA)

·                     Diskette Magazine Unit

·                     Initial 5250 Emulation Adapter for IBM Personal Computer (6072534)

Note 1: RPQs are available to convert models 012 and 020 to models T12 and T20 which are supported by 9402.


Accessories

                  P/N         Description
                -------  ---------------------------
                2438441  Twinax Port Tester English
                2438442  Twinax Port Tester Italian
                2438443  Twinax Port Tester Japanese
                69X7016  Async Modem Cable
                21F2674  Async Modem Cable Japan
                21F2671  Async Modem Cable Germany
                21F4505  20ft EIA 232 Terminal/Prt
                21F4342  40ft EIA 232 Terminal/Prt
                21F4346  100ft EIA 232 Terminal/Prt
                21F9965  20ft EIA 232 IWS
                21F4403  EIA 422 Surge Suppressor
                74F0381  20m (65.6 ft) Optical Cable
                74F0382  EIA 232/V.24 E 20ft
                74F0383  EIA 232/V.24 E 20ft Japan
                74F0384  EIA 232/V.24 E 20ft Germany
                74F0385  EIA 232/V.24 20ft
                74F0386  EIA 232/V.24 20ft Japan
                74F0387  EIA 232/V.24 20ft Germany
                74F0388  X.21 20ft
                74F0389  V.35 20ft
                74F0390  RS 366 Autocall 20ft
                74F0391  RS 366 Autocall 20ft Japan
                74F0392  EIA 232/V.24 E 50ft
                74F0393  EIA 232/V.24 E 50ft Japan
                74F0394  EIA 232/V.24 E 50ft Germany
                74F0395  EIA 232/V.24 50ft
                74F0396  EIA 232/V.24 50ft Japan
                74F0397  EIA 232/V.24 50ft Germany
                74F0398  X.21    50ft
                74F0399  V.35 50ft
                74F1825  EIA 232/V.24 E 80ft
                17G2577  EIA 232/V.24 E 80ft Japan
                17G2578  EIA 232/V.24 E 80ft Germany
                74F1827  V.35 80ft
                74F0360  Antenna Cable - 20 ft
                74F0361  Antenna Cable - 50 ft
                74F0362  Omni-Directional Antenna
                74F0363  Hemispherical Directional
                         Antenna
                74F0364  Directional Antenna
                74F0365  7208 4M Attachment Cable
                74F0366  3M (9.8 ft) AUI Ethernet
                         Cable
                74F0367  2.44M (8 ft) 802.5 Token-
                         Ring Cable
                74F0370  6.1M (20ft) CCITT V.35 cable
                74F0371  24.2M (80ft) CCITT V.35 cable
                74F0372  6.1M (20ft) CCITT V.36/EIA RS449 cable
                74F0373  24.2M (80ft) CCITT V.36/EIA RS449 cable
                74F0374  45.7M (150ft) CCITT V.36/EIA RS449 cable
                74F0369  6.1M (20ft) CCITT X.21
Note:  Order accessories via MSORDER (Category = Accessories/Supplies,
Machine Type = 9406 and by the part number.)

Customer Replacement Parts

Not available.


Machine Elements

Not available.


Supplies

Tape Cartridges:

·                     The 120MB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit uses the IBM 6150 Data Cartridge (120MB), part number 21F8588 or equivalent.

·                     The 525MB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit uses the IBM DC6525 Data Cartridge (525MB), part number 21F8697 or equivalent and the IBM DC6150 Data Cartridge, 21F8578.

·                     The 1.2GB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit uses the IBM DC9120 Data Cartridge (1.2GB), part number 21F8730 or equivalent and the IBM DC6150 and IBM DC6525 Data Cartridges. The IBM DC9120 Data Cartridge cannot be used in the 120MB or 525MB drives.

·                     The 2.5GB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit uses the IBM DC9250 Data Cartridge (2.5GB), part number 16G8436 or equivalent and the IBM DC6150, IBM DC6525 and IBM DC9120 Data Cartridges. The DC9250 Data Cartridge cannot be used in the 120MB, 525MB or 1.2GB drives.

·                     The 7208 Model 002 and 012 8mm Cartridge Tape Unit uses the IBM 8mm Data Cartridge, part number 21F8595 or equivalent.

·                     8mm internal tape feature #6390, can use the existing 8mm cartridges, however, in order to achieve 7GB uncompacted capacity, a new tape media, 160M 8mm Data Cartridge with Media Recognition, part number 87G1601 or equivalent, is required. This new media is not supported in the 7208 Models 002 and 012.

Note: 8mm data cartridge media must meet the proposed American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standard X3B5/89-136, Unrecorded Magnetic Tape Cartridge for Information Exchange.

·                     The 840MB QIC Mini Tape Unit uses the IBM MC3000XL Data Cartridge (840MB), part number 87G1618 for World Wide ordering .

Cleaning Cartridges and Kits:

·                     The 120MB and 525MB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Units use the IBM .25-Inch Cleaning Cartridge Kit, part number 16G8572 or equivalent.

·                     The 1.2GB, 2.5GB, and 13GB 1/4-Inch Cartridge Tape Unit use the IBM .25-Inch Cleaning Cartridge, part number 46G2674 for world wide ordering.

o                                            Note: This Cleaning Cartridge will NOT work in the 120MB or 525MB Tape Units.

·                     The 8mm Cartridge Tape Unit uses the IBM 8mm Cleaning Cartridge, part number 16G8467 should be used for all cleaning operations.

·                     The 840MB QIC Mini Tape Unit uses the IBM QIC Mini Cleaning Cartridge, part number 16G8583 for world wide ordering.

Diskettes

The diskette units utilize the following IBM or equivalent diskette media:

8-inch diskettes:

·                     IBM Diskette 1

o                                            P/N 2305830 128 Bytes/Sector

·                     IBM Diskette 2

o                                            P/N 2736700 256 Bytes/Sector

·                     IBM Diskette 2D

o                                            P/N 1766872 256 Bytes/Sector

o                                            P/N 1669044 512 Bytes/Sector

o                                            P/N 1669045 1024 Bytes/Sector

5 1/4-inch diskettes:

·                     IBM Diskette 2HC

o                                            P/N 6109660 80 Track/Double Sided

·                     8mm Data Cartridge media, 8mm Cleaning Cartridges and Diskette media supplies can be purchased from IBM Authorized Supplies Dealers, IBM Authorized Distributors or from IBM Direct through the following phone number:

o                                            888-426-6334.

·                     1/4-Inch Data Cartridge media, 1/4-Inch Cleaning Cartridges, QIC Mini Data Cartridge media, QIC Mini Cleaning Cartridges can be purchased by calling the following phone numbers:

o                                            Distributors, call 888-426-6334.

o                                            End user customers, call 888-IBM-MEDIA (888-426-6334).

Trademarks

(R), (TM), * Trademark or registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

** Company, product, or service name may be a trademark or service mark of others.

Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited.

File Last Updated on April 18, 2001